JP7452572B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a movable means (Patent Document 1).

JP2012-016623A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of making the movement of the movable means more suitable .

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the movable means can be moved suitably .

To achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first driving means, a movable means configured to be movable along a predetermined movement locus by the driving force of the first driving means, and a second driving means. a driving means, and a predetermined moving means movable upward from a predetermined position by the driving force of the second driving means moves with a falling motion and is moved along the predetermined movement locus. a first situation in which the movement width of the movable means can be restricted by abutting on a predetermined portion of the movable means; and a second situation in which the predetermined moving means does not abut on a predetermined portion of the movable means; In the first situation, the predetermined moving means can come into contact with a plurality of positions including a first position of the predetermined part or a second position of the predetermined part different from the first position. and a movement width of the movable means when the predetermined moving means is brought into contact with the first position, and a movement width of the movable means when the predetermined moving means is brought into contact with the second position. The first situation can be changed to the second situation by moving the movable means along the predetermined movement trajectory .

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the movement of the movable means can be made suitable .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface and a board lower unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower board unit. (a) is a front view of the base member, the first outlet, the second outlet, the lower left plate member, and the lower right plate member, and (b) is the base member taken along the line XVb-XVb in FIG. 15(a). and a sectional view of the lower left plate member. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical movement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the vertical movement unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the vertical movement unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the composite operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an expansion-contraction production device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an expansion-contraction production device. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a front view of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line of a protrusion part. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a sliding operation unit. FIG. 7 is a rear perspective view of the tilting operation unit and the sliding operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the tilting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the tilting operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member and a 2nd drive device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the rocking angle of a production member with respect to the rocking angle of a transmission member. It is a front view of a tilting operation unit and a sliding operation unit. It is a front view of a tilting operation unit and a sliding operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring in a second embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring in a third embodiment. (a) is a rear perspective view of a transmission member in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a rear perspective view of a movable abutting member. (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member, and (c) and (d) are top views of the transmission member. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the main body member of a production member. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a front view of the compound operation unit in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the composite operation unit. (a) is a partial front view of the rotating arm member in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a partial top view of the rotating arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXb in FIG. 69(a), and (c ) is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the switching device. (a) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a tilting operation unit in a seventh embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a flow path formation unit in an 8th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the direction change part, (b) is a top view of the direction change part as seen in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a), and (c) is a top view of the direction change part in FIG. 74(d) is a side view of the direction changing portion when viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVc; FIG. 74(d) is a side view of the direction changing portion when viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVd in FIG. 74(a). (a) is a front view of the recessed portion, (b) is a sectional view of the recessed portion taken along the line LXXVb-LXXVb of FIG. 75(a), and (c) is a front view of the recessed portion of FIG. 75(a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the recessed portion taken along the line LXXVc-LXXVc. It is a partial front view of a flow path formation unit. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the flow path forming unit. (a) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit, (b) is a partial sectional view of the flow path forming unit taken along the line LXXVIIIb-LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a), and (c) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit. 78(d) is a partial sectional view of the flow path forming unit taken along the line LXXVIIId-LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c). FIG. FIG. 78(a) is a partial sectional view of the flow path forming unit taken along the line LXXIX-LXXIX in FIG. 78(a). (a) to (c) are partial front views of the game board. It is a partial front view of a flow path formation unit. It is a partial front view of a flow path formation unit. It is a partial front view of a flow path formation unit. It is a partial front view of a flow path formation unit. It is a partial front view of the flow path formation unit in 9th Embodiment. (a) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a partial sectional view of the flow path forming unit taken along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a), and (c ) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit, and (d) is a partial sectional view of the flow path forming unit taken along the line LXXXVId-LXXXVId in FIG. 86(c). It is a partial front view of the flow path formation unit in 11th Embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (hereinafter also referred to as a game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prize winnings. It is configured by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640b, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral part is inside. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640b, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed from the front side of 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2. Further, the first variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the board lower unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640b. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640b, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640b. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640b. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, and the second prize opening 640b Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640b is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640b compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640b, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640b, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640b is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640b is released or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640b. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640b is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to have the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640b in the open state. Therefore, during the probability change and the time saving, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640b.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, there are other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the open time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a per win, etc., to enter the second prize opening 640b during the probability change or time saving. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows a portion of the balls that flow down the right side of the game board, among the balls fired at the game board, to pass through. It is composed of When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, to the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640b in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640b, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640b each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640b are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640b are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the winning hole 640b may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second winning opening 640b may be five balls.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640b. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640b. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win into the second winning opening 640b.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640b compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole 640b, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640b than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 640b, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 640b is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second winning hole 640b, so please turn to the first winning hole 64 where there is no electric accessory. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640b is likely to be in an open state, making it easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640b. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640b so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640b.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning hole 64, and a first specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the variable display device 80, and a second variable winning device 650, which has a circular shape approximately the same size as the other winning holes 63, 64, 640, is located approximately in the center of the second variable winning device 650. A specific winning hole 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640b becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning holes 65a and 650a, which are normally closed, are opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

The specific winning openings 65a, 650a are closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a, 650a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b ( (see FIG. 15, only the outer shape is shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball easily enters the first specific winning hole 65a, and between that open state and the normal state. It operates so that the closed state and the closed state are alternately repeated.

Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 has an opening/closing plate that is triangular in front view and is arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a, and is driven to open and close to the left with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with a large open port solenoid (not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the event of a jackpot, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the left, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the second specific winning hole 650a, and changing the open state and the normal state. It operates by alternately repeating the closed state and the closed state.

In this embodiment, it is possible to win a ball in the second variable winning device 650 by hitting left-handed, so the trouble of switching between hitting left-handed and hitting right every time the game state changes is eliminated. can do.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the gaming area, and when the LED corresponding to the jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a and 650a is opened for a predetermined time. When the ball enters the special winning hole 65a, 650a while the special winning hole 65a, 650a is open, a large opening hole provided separately from the special winning hole 65a, 650a opens for a predetermined period of time. A game state that is opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a, 650a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning hole 64, It is not limited to the left side of the variable display device 80, but may be placed below the first winning opening 64, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 314 and a second out port 315. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a pass through the first out port 314 or the second out port 315 and are ejected (not shown). guided to the road. The first out port 314 is arranged below the left side of the first winning opening 64, while the second out opening 315 is arranged below the right side of the first winning opening 64. That is, the second out port 315 is arranged on the opposite side of the first out port 314 with the first winning port 64 interposed therebetween.

Therefore, a ball flowing down the gaming area and reaching the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the gaming area on the right side of the first prize opening 64 in front view (right side in FIG. 2) will fall on the inner rail 61. Alternatively, the ball is flown down along the slope of the outer edge member 73 and guided to the ball ejection path through the second out port 315, while being guided to the lower end (inner rail 61) of the gaming area on the left side of the first winning port 64 in front view. The balls that have reached the ball are flown down along the slope (curve) of the inner rail 61, and are guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 is connected to the front side, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing, a solenoid for driving electric accessories, etc., and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 431, 466, 531, 561, 631, 661, 751.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the housing structure of each of the units 300 to 700 in the back case 210 will be described.

FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operating unit 200 when the disassembled operating unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the composite operation unit 500 is attached to the back case 210.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 has a bottom wall 211 and an outer wall 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 211, with one side (the front side in FIG. 6) being open. The device includes a back case 210 formed into a box shape. The back case 210 has a rectangular opening 211a formed in the center of the bottom wall 211, so that the back case 210 has a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size that corresponds to the external shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, allows the third symbol display device 81 to be disposed therein).

The operation unit 200 includes a vertical operation unit 400, a composite operation unit 500, a tilting operation unit 600, and a slide operation unit 700, which are housed in the inner space of the rear case 210, and are configured as one unit.

Specifically, the composite operation unit 500 is disposed at the upper right portion of the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7). In the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged at the lower part of the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210. Furthermore, in contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged in a stacked state on top of each other on the front side of the composite movement unit 500, and is housed in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, with respect to a predetermined motion unit (for example, the composite motion unit 500), other motion units (for example, the vertical motion unit 400) are arranged in a stacked state such that they are overlapped on the front side. Therefore, when viewed from the front, a predetermined operating unit can be shielded by other operating units.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light-transmissive material and the player can see the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13, the predetermined operation unit It is possible to allow the player to see only the necessary parts of the game, and to shield the other parts from the player by other operating units. As a result, there is no need to design a predetermined performance member that is shielded by other operation units on the premise that the entire part will be visible to the player, so it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the design. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of the operation modes of the vertical movement unit 400, the compound movement unit 500, the tilting movement unit 600, and the sliding movement unit 700 will be described. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200. In addition, FIG. 8 shows a state in which the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical movement unit 400 is placed in the extended position, and FIG. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged approximately at the center in the width direction.

As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical movement unit 400 moves the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210, making it invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 440 is lowered and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is placed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (i.e., the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). ).

As shown in FIG. 9, the compound operation unit 500 is arranged in an extended position where the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) extends downward, and the front plate member 546 is located at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (i.e., The front plate member 546 is placed in the extended state in which it is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and in the retracted position in which the rotating arm member 550 is retracted upward and the front plate member 546 is placed in the opening 211a of the back case 210. A reduced state (see FIG. 5) in which the object is retracted upward can be formed. In the contracted state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210, making it invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 can be moved between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. It is possible to move between locations. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting operation unit 600 is retracted to the right outside the opening 211a of the back case 210, and is visible to the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

Note that FIG. 10 shows a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened and the liquid crystal device inside is visible. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state shown in FIG. It is possible for the player to visually recognize both the effects displayed on the screen and the effects displayed on the screen.

Each of these operation units 400 to 700 is formed to be able to operate independently, and as described above, is arranged in an overlapping (stacked) state. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time, even if the operating members project inward of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, each of the operation units 400 to 700 can not only be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 11 is a front view of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 11, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the composite movement unit 500 is in an extended state, and the arm member 440 and lens member 460 of the vertical movement unit 400 are placed in the extended position, and the door member 470 is placed in the extended position. is formed into an open state.

As shown in FIG. 11, the front plate member 546 of the compound movement unit 500 is visible through the lens member 460 of the vertical movement unit 400. As described later, the lens member 460 is formed with a magnifying lens process, so that the front plate member 546 can be viewed in an enlarged manner.

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 11, the rotary plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the compound movement unit 500 is oscillated about the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved from the state shown in the vertical movement unit 400. When the front plate member 546 is moved to a position away from the lens member 470 in front view (see FIG. 39), the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in its normal size. Thereby, it is possible to switch between a state in which the front plate member 546 is viewed in its normal size and a state in which it is viewed in an enlarged manner (see FIG. 11), and the presentation effect can be improved.

FIG. 12 is a front view of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 12, the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the composite movement unit 500 is in the extended state, the tilting movement unit 600 is placed in the retracted position and in the tilting state, and the tilting movement unit 600 and the front plate member 546 The state immediately before the two come into contact is illustrated. As the tilting unit 600 is further tilted, the tilting unit 600 and the front plate member 546 come into contact with each other. In this case, by rocking the compound motion unit 500 clockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 39), it is possible to make it appear as if a force is being applied from the tilting motion unit 600 to the complex motion unit 500. (More complex effects can be created by linking the actions of units.) Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

Next, the lower panel unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the board 13 and the board lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 13, a receiving opening 13a is formed in the lower part of the game board 13 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and into which the lower board unit 300 is inserted.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower panel unit 300. As shown in FIG. 14, the lower board unit 300 includes a base member 310 that is fitted and fixed into the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13, and a base member 310 that is disposed at the lower left of the base member 310 when viewed from the front and that receives the ball from a first outlet. a lower left plate member 320 that guides the ball to the second outlet 314; a lower right plate member 330 that is disposed on the lower right side of the base member 310 when viewed from the front and guides the ball to the second outlet 315; and a lower left plate member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 310 from the front. It mainly includes a front lid member 340 in which the member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 are pivotally supported by an insertion shaft 343.

The base member 310 includes a plate-shaped main body 311 that has a shape that is approximately the same as the shape of the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and has a slightly smaller cross-sectional shape than the receiving opening 13a, and a front side of the main body 311. A decorative front plate part 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, a movable presentation member 313 attached to approximately the center in the width direction of the decorative front plate portion 312, and a movable presentation member 313 formed on the left side of the movable presentation member 313 when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a first out port 314 which is a rectangular hole, and a second out port 315 which is a rectangular hole formed on the right side of the movable presentation member 313 when viewed from the front.

The movable presentation member 313 includes a rotating presentation member 313a that is disposed at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13 and rotated by a drive device (not shown). Here, when the out port is arranged at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the movable presentation member 313 cannot be arranged at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13. In this embodiment, an out port is not provided at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13, but a first out port 314 and a second out port 315 are provided at positions spaced apart from the center of the game board 13 in the left and right directions. This makes it possible to secure a space for arranging the movable performance member 313 at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13.

With reference to FIG. 15, the shapes of the first outlet 314, the second outlet 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330 will be described. 15(a) is a front view of the base member 310, the first outlet 314, the second outlet 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. ) is a sectional view of the base member 310 and the lower left plate member 320 taken along the line XVb-XVb. Note that FIG. 15A shows the outer shape of the front lid member 340 fastened and fixed to the base member 310 and the nails formed above the first out port 314 and the second out port 315.

The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are ejected from the gaming area. Compared to the first outlet 314, the second outlet 315 has a shorter shape growth in the width direction. The reason will be explained later. Further, a guide rib 315a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner surface of the second outlet 315. The guide rib 315a makes it possible to suppress the resistance applied to the ball when the ball flowing into the second outlet 315 bounces high and collides with the upper bottom surface of the second outlet 315. Moreover, the flow of the balls discharged from the second out port 315 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, and variations in the direction of the discharged balls can be suppressed.

Further, the buffer ribs 322 of the lower left plate member 320, which will be described later, are formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) (see FIG. 15(a)). As a result, even in this embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area increases toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the effect of suppressing the rebound of the ball falling on the lower left plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer the ball is to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the higher the falling height of the ball becomes, so there is a possibility that the impact when the fallen ball collides with the lower left plate member 320 becomes larger. On the other hand, since the buffer ribs 322 are formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the more the buffer ribs 322 flex, creating a cushioning effect that cushions the impact of a fall. The degree can be increased.

Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of a falling ball will be explained. For example, if the falling height of a ball that lands on the buffer ribs 322, 332 is high, but the frequency of balls reaching that position is extremely low, it is not necessary to take the trouble of suppressing the bounce of the ball, as it may cause an obstruction to the ejection of other balls. It may not be possible. If the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, 332 is made large in this case, the space of the gaming area will be unnecessarily restricted. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, 332 is set based not only on the falling height of the ball, but also on the relationship between the falling height and the frequency with which the ball lands at that position.

As shown in FIG. 15, the ball flowing down above the buffer ribs 322, 332 starts flowing down along the paths c1, c2, and then passes through a plurality of branches b1-b10 to reach the landing areas z0-z4. In the following explanation, the probability that the ball will flow down is equal (1/2) on paths c1 and c2, and the probability that the ball will branch to the left or right at branches b1 to b10 is equal (1/2) to the left and right, respectively. Explain. Note that it is assumed that the ball does not flow down from the upper right.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z0 will be explained. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 and reach the route c11. The branch b5 can be reached from the route c1 via the branch b1, or from the route c2. Therefore, the probability that the ball will reach the path c11 and the landing area z0 is 1/8 (= 1/2 x (1/2)^2) of the ball falling from the path c1. Since it is expressed as the sum of the probability 1/4 (=1/2×1/2) of the ball falling from the path c2, it is 3/8 (“^” means a power). In other words, each probability is the product of 1/2 the probability that the ball will flow down the paths c1 and c2 and 1/2 raised to the power of the number of branches b1 to b10 that the ball passes before reaching the landing area z0. It is expressed as

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z1 will be explained. In order to reach the landing area z1, the vehicle must either flow down the left side at branch b3 and reach route c15, flow down the left side at branch b4 and reach route c16, or flow down the right side at branch b6 and reach route c14. It is necessary to reach the route c13 by flowing down the right side at the branch b7.

Up to branch b3, only the case where the ball flows down from path c1 is considered, and there are three branches before the ball reaches path c15, so the probability that the ball reaches path c15 is 1/16 (= 1/2×(1×2)^3). Furthermore, up to branch b4, only the case where the ball flows down from path c1 is considered, and there are four branches before the ball reaches path c16, so the probability that the ball reaches path c16 is 1/32 (=1/2×(1×2)^4). In addition, up to branch b6, only the case where the ball flows down from path c1 is considered, and there are three branches before the ball reaches path c14, so the probability that the ball reaches path c14 is 1/16 (=1/2×(1×2)^3).

Up to branch b7, both cases are considered in which the ball flows down from path c1 and path c2, and there are cases in which there are four branches before the ball flows down from path c1 and reaches path c13, and there are cases in which there are three branches. It may exist. There are two branches before the ball flowing down from the path c2 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the ball will reach path c13 is the probability that the ball will flow down from path c1, 3/32 (= 1/2 x (1/2)^4 + 1/2 x (1/2)^3), Since it is expressed as the sum of the probability of the ball falling from the path c2, 1/8 (=1/2×(1/2)^2), it is 7/32.

Here, the probability that the ball will arrive at the landing area z1 is 12/32 since it is the sum of the probabilities that the ball will arrive at the above-mentioned routes c13 to c16.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z2 will be explained. The probability that the ball will arrive at the landing area z2 can be expressed as the probability that the ball will arrive at the route c12, which is equal to the probability that the ball that has reached the branch b7 will arrive at the route c13. Therefore, the probability that the ball will reach the landing area z2 is 7/32.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z3 will be explained. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 and reach the route c17, or to flow down the left side at the branch b10 and reach the route c18.

Up to branch b9, only the case where the ball flows down from path c1 is considered, and there are six branches before the ball reaches path c17, so the probability that the ball reaches path c17 is 1/128 (= 1/2×(1×2)^6). Furthermore, up to branch b10, only the case where the ball flows down from path c1 is considered, and there are seven branches before the ball reaches path c18, so the probability that the ball reaches path c18 is 1/256. (=1/2×(1×2)^7).

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z3 is the sum of the probabilities that the ball will reach the above-mentioned routes c17 and c18, so it is 3/256.

The probability that the ball will reach the landing area z4 will be explained. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 and reach the route c19. It is assumed that all the balls flowing down the right side of the branch b10 flow down the path c19. The probability that the ball will reach the path c19 is equal to the probability that the ball that has reached the branch b10 will reach the path c18. Therefore, the probability that the ball will reach the landing area z4 is 1/256 (=1/2×(1×2)^7).

From these facts, the ratio of balls reaching each landing area z0 to z4 is (z0:z1:z2:z3:z4)=(96:96:56:3:1). This ratio has a correlation with the buffer ribs 322, 332.

For example, when comparing the landing area z1 and the landing area z3, although the heights of the balls falling on the landing areas z1 and z3 are the same, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is higher in the landing area z3. smaller than z1. This is because the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z3 is 1/32 of the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z1. That is, even if the bouncing of the falling ball is not suppressed to the extent that it is in the landing area z1, there is little risk that the ejection of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing area z3, by making the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 smaller than that in the landing area z1, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered.

For example, when comparing the landing area z2 and the landing area z4, the falling distance of the ball to the landing area z4 is longer than the falling distance of the ball to the landing area z2, but the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z4 is 1/56 of the rate at which the ball arrives at the landing area z2. That is, even if the bouncing of the falling ball is not suppressed to the same extent as in the landing area z2, there is little risk that the ejection of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing region z4, by making the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 smaller than that in the landing region z2, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered.

In addition, in the above explanation, the probability of the ball branching in the branches b1 to b10 is equal (1/2) on the left and right sides, but by changing the width of the nail, the probability of the ball branching in the branches b1 to b10 can be changed. It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by reducing the spacing between the nails in the channel through which the arrow on the left side of branch b1 passes, to the same extent as the diameter of the ball, the probability that the ball will flow down along the arrow on the right side at branch b1 is increased to more than 1/2. can do. For the other branches b2 to b10, the probability of branching the sphere can be adjusted in the same way.

This makes it possible to adjust the frequency with which the ball reaches the paths c11 to c19, and to improve the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322.

Further, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear (see FIG. 15(b)). This makes it possible to speed up the flow of the ball to the first out port 314.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 14. The lower left plate member 320 includes a main body part 321 in the form of a long plate, a buffer rib 322 in which thin plates are connected in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body part 321 and each extends in the front-rear direction, and the buffer ribs. A connecting front plate 323 formed in a manner to connect the front surfaces of the main body portion 322, a step portion 324 formed by protruding upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front, and a step portion 324 extending from the step portion 324 to the left side when viewed from the front. The main body section 321 mainly includes a ball flow rail section 325 and a shaft support hole 326 bored in the front-rear direction at the right end section of the main body section 321 when viewed from the front.

The buffer rib 322 is a part through which the ball heading toward the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses the ball falling in the vertical direction from rebounding in the vertical direction. That is, since the buffer ribs 322 are formed from thin plates arranged in a row in the left-right direction, when collided with a falling ball, the buffer ribs 322 bend in the thickness direction, thereby softening the impact of the collision. Furthermore, when the ball moves in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the buffer ribs 322, the ball fits between the buffer ribs 322, thereby braking the ball. Furthermore, the height and aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 are increased as they move toward the right side in front view (inward in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2)).

The connecting front plate 323 improves the strength of the buffer ribs 322 by connecting the buffer ribs 322.

The stepped portion 324 is a raised portion for allowing the balls flown down from the ball flow rail portion 325 to fall in the vertical direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress loads in the left-right direction from being applied to the buffer ribs 322 from the balls flowing down the ball flow rail portion 325. This can prevent the buffer ribs 322 from bending in the left-right direction due to loads in the left-right direction.

That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed from a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, there is a risk that the buffer rib 322 will break when a load is applied in the left-right direction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a ball rolling on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325, which has a speed in the left-right direction and is likely to apply a load in the left-right direction to the buffer rib 322, moves upward and downward from the stepped portion 324 to the buffer rib 322. It is formed in such a manner that it falls in the direction. Thereby, the position where the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be shifted to the right in the width direction as the speed of the ball in the left-right direction is faster.

Therefore, when the ball lands on the buffer ribs 322, the load applied to the buffer ribs 322 in the left-right direction can be made smaller toward the left (outside) in the width direction. Therefore, the further to the left in the width direction of the buffer rib 322, the lower the risk of bending due to the load in the left and right direction of the ball, and the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be formed to be smaller compared to the right side in the width direction. . In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer ribs 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer ribs 322 are arranged more easily than in the case where the buffer ribs 322 have the same length in the width direction. The position can be lowered.

Here, while keeping the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 constant at the left and right positions in the width direction (with the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 formed in the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 is It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along a curved surface formed in the curved surface. However, in this case, the step portion 324 is located higher, and the ball flow rail portion 325, which is formed to be inclined downward toward the step portion 324, is also located higher. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) increases, and the gaming area is suppressed.

On the other hand, the larger the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, the greater the effect of reducing the momentum of the ball (deceleration effect). Therefore, the buffer ribs 322 are formed in such a manner that the aspect ratio increases from the vicinity of the stepped portion 324 toward the center of the gaming area.

Note that the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 up to this side of the step portion 324 so as not to affect the height of the step portion 324 (midway in the left and right direction of the buffer rib 322). It is also conceivable that the height is maximum. However, in this case, the ball that has reached the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling to the left. Therefore, the ball tends to stay in the landing area z1, making it difficult to eject the ball smoothly.

In contrast, in this embodiment, since there is little variation in the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 in the width direction of the buffer rib 322, the ball that has reached the landing area z1 easily rolls to the left (toward the landing area z2 side). move. Therefore, the ball can flow to the landing area z2 before it stays in the landing area z1, so that the ball can be smoothly discharged.

Further, the stepped portion 324 has a function of blocking the ball flowing above the buffer rib 322 and flowing to the left. This can prevent the ball from rebounding beyond the width of the first outlet 314 after colliding with the front cover member 340 (see FIG. 13).

The shaft support hole 326 is a portion through which the insertion shaft 343 of the front lid member 340 is inserted and supported.

The lower right plate member 330 includes a main body portion 331 in the form of a long plate, a buffer rib 332 having thin wall portions extending in the front-rear direction, which are continuous in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 331, and A connecting front plate 333 formed to connect the front surfaces of the buffer ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 recessed downward at the right end of the main body portion 331 when viewed from the front, and a portion extending from the recessed portion 324 to the right side when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a ball flow rail section 335 that extends to the main body section 331, and a shaft support hole 336 that is bored in the front-rear direction at the left end portion of the main body section 331 when viewed from the front.

Note that the configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body part 331 is connected to the main body part 321, the buffer rib 332 is connected to the buffer rib 322, the connecting front plate 333 is connected to the connecting front plate 323, the ball flow rail part 335 is connected to the ball flow rail part 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is connected to the shaft support hole 336. Since the technical idea is the same as that of the support hole 326, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted.

The buffer rib 332 is formed to have a shorter left and right width than the buffer rib 322. As a result, the left and right forming width of the second out port 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward compared to the first out port 314, so that the first variable A space for arranging the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 can be secured (the arrangement position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered).

Here, the reason why the width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 is that the flow path of the ball to the second out port 315 is regulated. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, by disposing the first variable winning device 65 on the upper right side of the second out port 315 when viewed from the front, the ball flows into the first specific winning port 65a when the opening/closing plate is opened. When the opening/closing plate is closed, the ball is dropped vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second out port 315 from the upper right side when viewed from the front. In other words, a non-flowing region is formed in the upper right corner of the second out port 315 where the ball is prevented from flowing down.

Therefore, the direction in which the ball flows down to the lower right plate member 330 is limited to only the vertical direction and the width direction (from the ball flow rail section 335) (flowing down diagonally from the upper right side is restricted). . Therefore, since there is no inflow of the ball from the diagonally upper right side, the direction in which the ball bounces can be restricted, the width of the buffer rib 332 can be narrowed, and the width of the second out port 315 can be narrowed. As a result, a space for installing the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

The recessed portion 334 is a recess for causing the balls flowing down the ball flow rail portion 335 to bounce. Therefore, the width of the recessed portion 334 is such that the ball can be placed therein without coming into contact with the adjacent buffer ribs 332.

The ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail section 335 is dropped into the recessed section 334 , bounces off by coming into contact with the upper surface of the recessed section 334 , and falls onto the buffer rib 332 . This prevents a load from being applied to the buffer ribs 332 from the width direction, and prevents the buffer ribs 332 from breaking.

Note that the recessed portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 is inserted. This makes it easier to use a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing a fastening screw into the fastening hole B to fasten and fix the board lower unit 300 to the game board 13. That is, the recessed portion 334 has both the effect of preventing the buffer rib 332 from breaking and the effect of facilitating fastening and fixing of the base member 310.

The front lid member 340 includes a plate-shaped main body part 341 in which the first prize opening 64 is formed at the top, and an opening part 342 formed in the center of the main body part 341 to make the rotating performance member 313a visible. It mainly includes a pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

The main body part 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the downward direction of the ball is limited by the side wall part. That is, a ball that collides with the main body 341 from the right cannot penetrate to the left, while a ball that collides with the main body 341 from the left cannot penetrate to the right.

The insertion shaft 343 is a portion inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336. Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is formed slightly smaller than that of the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

Next, the vertical movement unit 400 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 16 and 17 illustrate a state in which the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position.

18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical movement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that includes a vertical groove portion 414 that is recessed from the back side toward the front side on the right side when viewed from the rear, and the recess extends in the vertical direction. , a rotating crank member 420 that rotates around a connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, a drive device 430 that generates a driving force for the rotating crank member 420, and a driving force transmitted from the rotating crank member 420 to the base member 410. The arm member 440 is arranged on the opposite side of the vertical groove part 414 of the base member 410 and is formed to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swinging of the arm member 440. A slide member 450, a lens member 460 that is suspended in a slide hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440 and is formed to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swinging of the arm member 440, and the lens member. The door member 460 mainly includes a pair of door members 470 each pivotally supported by the door member 460 .

The base member 410 includes a main body part 411 formed in a horizontally elongated plate shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding from the right end of the main body part 411 toward the front side. A supported shaft portion 412, a connecting hole 413 that is circularly bored in the front-rear direction and connects the rotating crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and are formed from the back side to the front side on the right side of the main body portion 411 when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a vertical groove part 414 in which a depression extends in the vertical direction, and a recessed part 415 that is depressed from the front side to the back side on both left and right outer sides of the vertical groove part 414.

The vertical groove portion 414 is a portion in which the telescopic performance device 540 of the composite action unit 500 is housed on the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, in the compound operation unit 500, the swinging angle of the telescopic effect device 540 is suppressed as the telescopic effect device 540 moves toward the contracted state. Collision with the left and right inner surfaces is prevented. The recessed portion 415 is a portion along which the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

The rotating crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body 421 and a sliding protrusion 422 that projects from one end of the main body 421 in a cylindrical shape toward the front side and is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440. , an engaging portion 423 that is engaged with a fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 and disables relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420.

When the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotated, the driving force of the drive device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440, and the arm member 440 is swung around the shaft portion 412. .

The drive device 430 includes a drive motor 431 fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a drive gear 431a rotationally driven by the drive motor 431, a transmission gear 432 meshed with the drive gear 431a, and the transmission gear 432. It mainly includes a fitting part 432a formed on the front side thereof with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting hole 413, and whose inner side surface is fitted into the engaging part 423 of the rotating crank member 420.

The fitting portion 432a is a portion having a recess with a cross-sectional shape in which a circular shape is arranged at each vertex of a triangle, and is inserted into the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, and is connected to the rotating crank member 420 at its tip side. The engaging portion 423 is fitted so as to be relatively unrotatable. As a result, the main body 411 of the base member 410 is sandwiched between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420, and as described above, the relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420 is disabled. , the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420 rotate synchronously. That is, the driving force of the drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432.

The arm member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in the shape of a long rod, a shaft support hole 442 that is bored on the base end side (right side in front view) and swingably supported by the shaft portion 412, and a shaft support hole 442 on the base end side (right side in front view). A sliding hole 443 is formed as a long hole on the swinging end side, which is the opposite end of the lens member 460 , and the sliding projection 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted into the sliding hole 443 . It mainly includes a bottomed hole-shaped insertion part 444.

Note that the shape of the insertion portion 444 is set such that the rotary crank member 420 can rotate once while the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444. Therefore, the arm member 440 can perform a swinging motion regardless of the rotational direction of the rotating crank member 420.

The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-shaped body portion 451, a slide guide portion 452 that extends rearward from both left and right ends of the body portion 451 and is guided in a recessed portion 415 so as to be slidable up and down, and a body portion. A central guide recess 453 which is a recess extending in the vertical direction formed on the front face at the center in the width direction of the lens member 451 and into which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted; It mainly includes guide recesses 454 at both ends, which are recesses formed on the front surface and extending in the vertical direction, and guide the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460.

The lens member 460 includes a plate-shaped main body 461 in which a circular opening is formed in the center, a magnifying lens 462 that is fitted into the opening of the main body 461 and has a magnifying lens processing formed thereon, and a center in the width direction of the main body 461. A sliding protrusion 463 that protrudes toward the back side at the upper end and is inserted into the sliding hole 443 of the arm member 440 so as to be slidable up and down; A stable sliding part 464 is vertically slidably inserted into the guide recesses 454 at both ends of the member 450, and a lower shaft part 473 and an upper part of the door member 470 are rotatably disposed at the lower left of the main body part 461 when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a pair of rotating barrels 465 into which the shaft portion 474 is inserted, and a drive motor 466 that rotates the pair of rotating barrels 465 in opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown).

With reference to FIG. 20, the moving operation of the vertical movement unit 400 will be described. FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. Note that FIG. 20 illustrates a closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is placed in the extended position.

When the arm member 440 swings from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the extended position (see FIG. 20), the lens member 460 that is pivotally supported in the sliding hole 443 on the swing end side of the arm member 440 slides. The movable protrusion 463 (see FIG. 18) is slid in the central guide recess 453 of the slide member 450. Since the lens member 460 is vertically guided by the guide recesses 454 at both ends of the slide member 450, and the slide member 450 is vertically guided by the recesses 415 of the base member 410, the lens member 440 swings. The member 460 is slid in the vertical direction.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 18 and 19. The door member 470 is configured by dividing a circular plate into upper and lower parts, and includes a lower main body part 471 formed on the lower side, an upper main body part 472 formed on the upper side of the lower main body part 471, and a lower main body part 472 formed on the upper side of the lower main body part 471. A lower shaft part 473 is provided at the lower end of the main body part 471 in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the rotary tube 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to be relatively rotatable. It mainly includes an upper shaft part 474 which is protruded in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotary cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

The lower main body part 471 includes a guide protrusion 471a that protrudes from the side surface of the side that comes into contact with the upper main body part 472, A receiving recessed portion 472a is provided. By fitting the guide protrusion 471a and the receiving recess 472a, relative positioning of the lower body part 471 and the upper body part 472 in the closed state can be performed. In this embodiment, since the guide protrusion 471a is tapered and protrudes, the guide protrusion 471a can be reliably fitted into the receiving recess 472a.

The operation of the door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. Note that FIG. 21 illustrates the open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is placed in the extended position.

The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by rotation of the rotary cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. The pair of rotating barrels 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), so that the door member 470 is changed from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). In this case, the lower main body part 471 and the upper main body part 472 can be swung outward (in opposite directions) from each other. Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung inwardly relative to each other.

Thereby, compared to the case where the front side of the lens member 460 is covered by swinging a single cover member, the time for swinging the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be halved.

Next, the composite operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 45. The compound operation unit 500 places the telescopic presentation device 540 in front of the third symbol display device 81 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the extended position (see FIG. 9). It is a unit. Moreover, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is formed to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510.

22 is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the compound operation unit 500. Note that FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at a retracted position, which is a terminal position formed outside the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 24 is a front exploded perspective view of the compound operation unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of the compound operation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the composite action unit 500 is a unit that performs effects by sliding and swinging a telescopic effect device 540, and includes a base member 510 forming a skeleton, and a base member 510 that forms a skeleton. A rotary plate 520 formed to be rotatable around a first shaft portion 512, a first drive device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and generates a driving force for the rotary plate 520, and a first drive device 530 that is fastened to the front of the rotary plate 520. A telescopic effect device 540 that is fixed and expandable in the radial direction of the rotary plate 520, one end of which is connected to the telescopic effect device 540, and the other end on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510. together with a rotating arm member 550 that forms an extending and contracting motion of the extending and contracting effect device 540 through a swinging motion; a second drive device 560 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and generates a driving force for the rotating arm member 550; A rotating crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the drive device 560 to the rotating arm member 550 is fastened and fixed from the front of the base member 510, and mechanical parts on the rotating shaft side such as the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are connected to each other. It mainly includes a front cover 580 that hides the eyes.

The base member 510 includes a main body portion 511 having a rectangular plate shape, a first shaft portion 512 having a cylindrical shape protruding forward from a substantially central lower part in the width direction of the main body portion 511, and a first shaft portion 512. Three rows of arcuate holes 513 drilled along a central arc, and a first through hole 514 drilled adjacent to the second arcuate hole 513b among the three rows of arcuate holes 513. and a cylindrical second shaft portion 515 protruding forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511; A second through hole 516 is formed, a cylindrical third shaft portion 517 is formed to protrude forward from the lower right end of the main body 511 when viewed from the front, and a third shaft portion 517 is bent forward from the edge of the main body 511. The bent wall portion 518 is mainly configured to include a bent wall portion 518.

The first shaft portion 512 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 522 of the rotary plate 520 and becomes a rotation axis of the rotary plate 520. Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520.

The arcuate hole 513 includes, from the side closer to the first shaft portion 512, a first arcuate hole 513a, a second arcuate hole 513b, and a third arcuate hole 513c.

The first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c are elongated holes through which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotary plate 520 is inserted and guide the rotation of the rotary plate 520. Thereby, the load that the first shaft portion 512 receives when the rotary plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotary plate 520 can be improved. Note that although FIGS. 24 and 25 show a state in which the collar is fastened to the tip of the insertion shaft 525, the first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c connect the collar and the main body portion 521. (inserted before fastening the collar).

The second arc-shaped hole 513b is a long hole in which the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 is arranged and moved. The upper side of the substantially central portion is open, and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 is disposed in the open part. As a result, the meshing portion between the drive motor 531 of the first drive device 530 and the arcuate rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 can be disposed in the plate thickness portion of the main body portion 511. The dimension in the longitudinal direction (the dimension in the longitudinal direction in FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes through which the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 and the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 are inserted, respectively.

The second shaft portion 515 is a cylindrical portion to which the lid portion 575 of the rotating crank member 570 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and serves as a central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571 . Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 of the rotating crank member 570.

The third shaft portion 517 is inserted into the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 and serves as a central axis of rotation of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550. A torsion spring 517a is wound around the third shaft portion 517 to generate a biasing force that moves the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position.

The torsion spring 517a is formed in such a manner that arm portions extend from both ends of a coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517, respectively. One arm portion is fixed to the lower right portion of the bending wall portion 518 in front view (near the first stopper portion 518a), and the other arm portion on the opposite side of the one arm portion is engaged with the rotating arm member 550. It is locked by the stop portion 555.

The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed on the right side of the first shaft portion 512, and a second stopper portion 518b formed on the left side of the first shaft portion 512. It mainly includes a third stopper portion 518c formed in the third stopper portion 518c.

The first stopper portion 518a is a portion that restricts rotation of the rotating arm member 550. That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the extended position (see FIG. 9), it comes into contact with the first stopper portion 518a, and the lowering is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper part 518b is disposed lower than the third stopper part 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotary plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotary plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the rotation direction toward the second stopper portion 512b. Can be done. That is, in the telescopic effect device 540, which will be described later, the maximum angle of the clockwise swing when viewed from the front is larger than that of the counterclockwise swing when viewed from the front.

The rotary plate 520 includes a fan-shaped plate-shaped main body 521, a shaft support hole 522 formed circularly in the thickness direction at the base of the main body 521, and a main body with a width slightly larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 that is linearly recessed on the front surface of the main body 521 , a pair of telescopic stoppers 524 that protrude forward on both sides of the lower end of the rail receiving groove 523 , and a pair of telescopic stoppers 524 that project from the back of the main body 521 a plurality of insertion shafts 525 (three in this embodiment), and an arc-shaped rack protruding from the back surface of the main body 521 in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 522, and having gear teeth carved on the outer periphery. 526.

The first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is inserted through the shaft support hole 522 . Therefore, the rotary plate 520 is oscillated around the first shaft portion 512.

The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion to which the slide rail 545 of the telescopic presentation device 540 is fastened and fixed, and the telescopic presentation device 540 extends and contracts along the extending direction of the rail receiving groove 523. Therefore, depending on the attitude of the rotary plate 520, the moving direction of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is changed.

The telescopic stopper 524 is a part that abuts the inner surface of the sliding plate 544 of the telescopic effect device 540 in the vertical direction, and regulates the movement width of the sliding plate 544. By being formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523 and coming into contact with the inner surface of the slide plate 544 on both sides, the slide rail 545 is prevented from receiving a load in a direction perpendicular to the direction of expansion and contraction, thereby improving durability. can be achieved.

The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted into the first circular arc hole 513a and the third circular arc hole 513c of the base member 510 and guides the rotation of the rotary plate 520, and has a diameter that is equal to the diameter of the first circular arc hole 513a and the third circular hole 513c. It is formed to be slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arcuate hole 513c. Further, by fastening and fixing a collar member having a diameter larger than the width of the first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c to the tip, the rotary plate 520 is irremovably connected to the base member 510.

The arcuate rack 526 is inserted into the second arcuate hole 513b of the base member 510 and meshed with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530. Since the meshing portion between the arcuate rack 526 and the first drive device 530 is formed in a region including the thick portion of the base member 510, the dimension of the composite operation unit 500 in the thickness direction can be suppressed.

The first drive device 530 mainly includes a drive motor 531 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and a drive gear 532 that is inserted into the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and rotated by the drive motor 531 .

Next, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the telescopic effect device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the telescopic effect device 540.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the telescopic effect device 540 includes a main body member 541 that forms a skeleton, and a rotating arm member 550 that is connected to the main body member 541, and a pair of members are fastened and fixed to the back surface of the main body member 541. A first guide member 542 and a second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted, and the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are disposed so as to be axially slidable along the extending direction of the insertion holes 542d and 543d. a slide rail 545 that connects the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520 and has one end fitted into the rail receiving groove 523 and is fastened and fixed; A front plate member 546 that is fastened and fixed, a connecting sliding member 547 that is slidably supported by a shaft support 546c of the front plate member 546, and a front hanging portion that is fastened and fixed to the connecting sliding member 547. 548b mainly includes a decorative member 548 movably formed in front of the main body member 541.

The main body member 541 includes a plate-shaped main body 541a forming a skeleton, a cylindrical protrusion 541b protruding toward the back side at the widthwise center of the main body 541a, and a rear surface of the protrusion 541b. A first raised fastening part 541c is provided as a pair of upper and lower parts to protrude from the left side when viewed from the rear, a second raised fastener part 541d is provided as a pair of upper and lower parts to protrude from the right side of the projection part 541b when viewed from the rear, and a second raised fastening part 541d is provided on the upper left side of the main body part 541a when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a protruding guide fastening part 541e and a plurality of fastening holes 541f (three in this embodiment) formed on the front side of the main body part 541a and into which the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

The protruding portion 541b is a portion that is inserted into the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the protrusion 541b is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554. Moreover, since the protrusion 541b is inserted into the arcuate hole 554, when the rotating arm member 550 is swung, the main body member 541 can be moved in conjunction.

The first raised fastening part 541c is a part that fastens and fixes the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastener part 541d is a part that fastens and fixes the second guide member 543. The reason why the second raised fastening part 541d is separated from the first raised fastening part 541c in the vertical direction is longer because the second raised fastening part 541d is arranged in a selected position where it does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550. Here, in this embodiment, the rotating arm member does not pass the lower left side of the main body member 541 in the front view in its rotation locus (see FIGS. 37, 40, and 44). Therefore, it becomes possible to widen the arrangement interval between the pair of second raised fastening parts 541d compared to the first raised fastening parts 541c, and the rigidity of the second raised fastening parts 541d can be improved.

The guide fastening part 541e is a part to which the auxiliary fastening part 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and is a part to which the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided when the telescopic effect device 540 is in the extended state. That is, even if the protrusion 541b is not guided by the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guide fastening portion 541e is guided by the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating arm member 550 rotates upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the telescopic effect member 540 are operated in conjunction with each other.

The fastening hole 541f is a through hole to which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a that is fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a back surface regulating portion that extends upward from a position that rides on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a one step toward the back side. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c that protrudes like a wall from both left and right sides of the back surface regulating portion 542b toward the back surface, and a guide rail portion 542c that extends vertically through a portion of the upper end of the back surface regulating portion 542b that protrudes toward the back surface side. It mainly includes an insertion hole 542d, and an auxiliary fastening part 542e that extends from the back surface regulating part 542b and is fastened and fixed to the guide fastening part 541e.

The back surface regulating portion 542b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the protruding portion 541b from falling off from the arcuate hole 554 when the rotating arm member 550 moves to the back surface. be.

The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion/contraction production device 540 performs an expansion/contraction operation, and suppresses deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542.

The insertion hole 542d is a hole into which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable relative to the first guide member 542.

The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raised fastening portion 541d, and a back surface regulating portion that extends upward from a position that rides on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a one step toward the back side. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c that protrudes like a wall from both left and right sides of the back surface regulating portion 543b toward the back surface, and a guide rail portion 543c that extends vertically through a portion of the upper end of the back surface regulating portion 543b that protrudes toward the back surface side. It mainly includes an insertion hole 543d.

The back surface regulating portion 543b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the protruding portion 541b from falling off from the arcuate hole 554 when the rotating arm member 550 moves to the back surface. be.

The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion/contraction production device 540 performs an expansion/contraction operation, and suppresses deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543.

The insertion hole 543d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable relative to the first guide member 543.

The slide plate 544 includes a main body part 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed part 544b in which a wide depression extending in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface of the main body part 544a, and a recessed part 544b of the recessed part 544b. Recessed portions 544c at both ends in which recesses extending in the vertical direction are formed on the left and right front surfaces, and rail receivers protruding semicircularly toward the front side at the upper and lower ends of the recessed portions 544c at both ends. 544d, a cylindrical slide rod 544e extending vertically inside the recessed portions 544c at both ends, and a performance auxiliary wall 544f protruding toward the front at approximately the center of the main body 544a in the vertical direction. The recessed portion 544b mainly includes stopper portions 544g that protrude toward the back surface at both left and right ends at the upper and lower ends.

The recessed portion 544b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the telescopic stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520. Therefore, the width of the inner surface of the recessed portion 544b is formed to be slightly larger than the width dimension of the telescopic stopper 524.

The both-end recessed portions 544c are portions that accommodate protrusions into which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. Thereby, the projections in which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed can be guided from the outside.

The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion accommodated in the guide rail portions 542c, 543c of the guide members 542, 543. Thereby, wobbling of the guide members 542, 543 with respect to the slide plate 544 can be suppressed.

The slide rod 544e is a cylindrical rod inserted into the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. Thereby, the guide members 542, 543 are formed to be slidable in the extending direction of the slide rod 544e (vertical direction in FIG. 26).

The presentation assisting portion 544f is a portion that comes into contact with the rear hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 when the telescopic presentation device 540 is in an extended state, and moves the decorative member 548. Thereby, the appearance of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be changed.

The stopper portion 544g is a portion that comes into contact with the telescopic stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 and defines the vertical movement end of the slide plate 544.

The slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotary plate 520, and the other end opposite to the one end is fastened and fixed to the recessed part 544b of the slide plate 544.

The front plate member 546 is a presentation part that is visible to the player, and includes a plate-shaped main body part 546a formed in approximately the same shape as the main body member 541 when viewed from the front, and a plate-shaped main body part 546a that extends from the main body part 546a toward the back side. It mainly includes a fastening part 546b that protrudes in accordance with the formation position of the fastening hole 541f, and a pair of shaft supports 546c that protrudes from the upper end of the main body part 546a toward the back side.

The fastening portion 546b is a portion that fixes the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

The shaft support 546c is a portion that pivotally supports the connecting sliding member 547 in a slidable manner. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support 546c is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b of the connecting sliding member 547.

The connecting sliding member 547 has a main body portion 547a formed in a plate shape, a pair of sliding elongated holes 547b formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending vertically, and bored in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a pair of insertion holes 547c.

The sliding elongated hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft support 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is formed to be slightly larger than that of the shaft support 546c. By fastening and fixing a collar member whose outer diameter is larger than the width of the inner circumferential surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b to the tip of the shaft support 546c, the connecting sliding member 547 is pivotally supported by the front plate member 546 in a manner that cannot be pulled out. Ru. The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

The decorative member 548 includes a main body part 548a formed in a plate shape and to which the connecting sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front sagging part 548b formed by hanging downward on the front side of the main body part 548a, and a main body part 548a. It mainly includes a rear hanging part 548c formed by hanging downward on the rear side of the main body.

When the connecting sliding member 547 moves relative to the front plate member 546, the front sagging portion 548b is in a state where it covers the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and a state in which it is separated from the front plate member 546 and is visible (see FIG. 37) can be formed. Thereby, the appearance of the telescopic effect member 540 can be changed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The rear hanging portion 548c is a portion that comes into contact with the presentation auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 due to the expansion and contraction operation of the telescopic presentation device 540, and when the rear hanging portion 548c comes into contact with the presentation auxiliary wall 544f, the decorative member 548 is moved relative to the front plate member 546.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 24 and 25. The rotating arm member 550 includes a main body 551 formed in an elongated rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 bored in the front-rear direction at one end of the main body 551, and a shaft support hole 552 adjacent to the shaft support hole 552. A special shaped elongated hole 553, which is a specially shaped elongated hole with a bottom, is formed on the back side of the main body portion 551, and an irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 is formed on the front side of the other end, which is the end opposite to one end. An arcuate hole 554, which is a long hole with an arcuate bottom, protrudes toward the back side near the shaft support hole 552 of the main body portion 551, and its tip is bent into a hook shape, and the other arm of the torsion spring 517a is locked. It mainly includes a locking part 555.

The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole into which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517, so that the rotating arm member 550 is formed to be rotatable about the third shaft portion 517.

The irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 is a portion into which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 will be described later.

The arcuate hole 554 is a long hole into which the projection 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the arcuate hole 554 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 541b. Further, the arc formed by the arc-shaped hole 554 coincides with the arc formed by the protrusion 541b when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 in an expanded state (Figs. 37 to 39 ).

Further, the arcuate hole 554 is open at the tip of the other end of the rotary arm member 550, and includes a mouth portion 554a whose width increases at the tip.

The second drive device 560 is a device that generates a driving force to rotate the rotating crank member 570, and includes a drive motor 561 fastened and fixed to the base member 510, and a drive motor 561 that is inserted into the second through hole 516 of the base member 510. It mainly includes a drive gear 562 that is rotated by a drive motor 561 .

Drive gear 562 is meshed with transmission gear teeth 572 of rotating crank member 570 . Thereby, when the drive gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

The rotating crank member 570 is a member that transmits driving force to the rotating arm member 550, and includes a ring-shaped main body portion 571 that is pivotally supported by the second shaft portion 515, and a ring-shaped main body portion 571 that is engraved on the outer circumferential surface of the main body portion 571. A transmission gear tooth 572 provided, a regulating umbrella portion 573 formed to cover the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572, and a sliding member protruding toward the front side at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 571. It mainly includes a protrusion 574 and a lid 575 formed with a larger diameter than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 571 and fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft 515 .

The transmission gear teeth 572 are meshed with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 . Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 561 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 570.

The regulating umbrella portion 573 prevents the drive gear 532 from shifting toward the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572. Thereby, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear teeth 572 can be optimized.

The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion that is inserted into the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550. That is, depending on the relationship between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550, it is determined whether or not the driving force is transmitted.

The lid portion 575 is a portion for irremovably disposing the main body portion 571 on the base member 510.

The relationship between the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. First, the shape of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28(a) and 29(a).

28(a) and 29(a) are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. Note that FIG. 28(a) shows a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position, and FIG. 29(a) shows a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the extended position. , 28(a) and 29(a), the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 and the sliding protrusion 574 are illustrated with hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 are illustrated with imaginary lines. be done.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), when the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 An upward perpendicular state is formed in which the rotation axis and the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 552 are perpendicular to each other.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), when the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the extended position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and a straight line connecting the rotating crank member 570 It is possible to form a downward orthogonal state in which the rotation axis and the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 552 are perpendicular to each other. Note that FIG. 29(a) shows a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the above-described downward orthogonal state.

The irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 includes a transmission groove 553a through which driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 moves, and a first non-transmission wall connected from the upper end of the transmission groove 553a. 553b and a second non-transmission wall portion 553c that is connected from the lower end of the transmission groove portion 553a, and a selection wall portion 553d that connects the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Be prepared.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the transmission groove portion 553a is a recessed groove that extends linearly to the left from the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove 553a is formed with a length that allows the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 to move from an upward orthogonal state to a downward orthogonal state, and the formed width of its inner peripheral surface is slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. Formed large. Therefore, while the sliding protrusion 574 moves in the transmission groove 553a, driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in the upward orthogonal state. This is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view from the upward orthogonal state, the rotating crank member 570 idles relative to the rotating arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotating crank member 570 is transferred to the rotating arm. It is not transmitted to member 550.

Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed in the retracted position (see FIG. 28(a)), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b moves. The direction is toward the axis of rotation of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall 553b, the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 due to rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is reduced by the rotation of the rotating crank member 570. Directed to the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall 553b, rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the second non-transmission wall portion 553c extends from the lower wall surface of the right end of the transmission groove portion 553a to the rotation crank when the rotation arm member 550 is placed in the extended position. This is a wall portion formed along the circumcircle of the sliding protrusion 574 centered on the rotation axis of the member 570. That is, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the downward orthogonal state (the state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise in the front view from the state in FIG. 29(a)), The rotating crank member 570 idles relative to the rotating arm member 550, and no driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550.

Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. It will be done. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed facing the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 29(b)), a load is applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550. is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall 553c, rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

The selection wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed from a smooth curved surface connecting the right end portion of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b in front view and the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c in front view. It is formed above the curved line that is an extension of the transmission wall portion 553b.

The selection wall portion 553d is arranged to face the right side portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed in such a manner that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c increases toward the left end of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when rotating the rotating crank member 570 clockwise in front view from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), the sliding protrusion 574 crosses the first non-transmission wall 553b and becomes the second non-transmission wall. In the margin D (see FIG. 32(b)) until reaching the wall portion 553c, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and no restriction on rotation occurs. That is, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is not restricted by the sliding protrusion 574.

The right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the forming angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is It is formed in such a manner that it intersects the circular arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the angle formed between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the circular arc S1.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the amount of swinging of the rotating arm member 550 required to correspond to the amount of change changes. That is, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount with the sliding projection 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d in contact with each other, the amount of swing of the rotating arm member 550 is , is smaller than the amount of rocking of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transferring wall 553c change by a predetermined amount in a state where they are in contact with each other. Therefore, the swing of the rotating arm member 550 relative to the speed of the rotating crank member 570 depends on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall 553c or the selection wall 553d. The speed can be changed.

The explanation will be given by returning from FIG. 28 to FIG. 31. 28 to 31 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570, illustrating the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 28(a), the above-mentioned upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position), and in FIGS. 28 to 31, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view. The rotated state is illustrated in order, and the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated with hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 are illustrated with imaginary lines. .

In addition, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the posture of the telescopic effect device 540 in which it expands and contracts in the vertical direction is detected by a position detection sensor (not shown), and the swinging is stopped in that posture. That is, from FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, the swinging of the telescopic effect device 540 is prevented by the resistance between it and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25).

In the state shown in FIG. 28(a), the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position vertically downward by a distance h1 from the protrusion 541b. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state, the protrusion 541b is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 28(a) (rotated counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)) by an angle T1, A state in which the sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is placed at a position vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2<h1) (FIG. 28(b) ) to reach ). During this time, the inner circumferential surfaces of the irregularly shaped elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and come into contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28(b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)) counterclockwise at an angle T2 (T2≒180 degrees>T1 ), the sliding protrusion 574 moves through the transmission groove 553a of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 (transmission region), enters the area facing the second non-transmission wall 553c, and the protrusion 541 becomes the reference. It reaches a state in which it is placed at a position vertically upward from the horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3<h2) (see FIG. 29(a)). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28(c), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), it is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T3 (T3>T2). ), the sliding protrusion 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 29(b) is reached. During this time, since the inner circumferential surface of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 moves from the rotating arm No driving force is transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upwardly spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIGS. It is pushed by the non-transmission wall portion 553c. In this case, the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, thereby restricting the swinging of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in front view from the states shown in FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b).

Here, one possible method for stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state shown in FIG. 29(a) is to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the rotating crank member 570 is brought to a sudden stop with the operating speed of the rotating arm member 550 being high until just before it reaches the extended position, a load will be applied to the second drive device 560, causing a decrease in the speed of the rotating crank member 570. If it is made too loose, it will not be possible to improve the production effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated to the state shown in FIG. 29(b) without being stopped in the state shown in FIG. The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state shown in FIG. 29(a) (the protrusion 541 can be stopped at a position spaced vertically upward by a distance h3 from the reference horizontal line O). As a result, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member 570 changes from the state of FIG. 29(a) to the state of FIG. 29(b). 570 can be slowed down. Therefore, there is no need to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, it is possible to both improve the performance effect of the rotating arm member 550 and improve the durability of the second drive device 560.

From the state of FIG. 29(b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), it is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T4 (T4≒270 degrees>T3). ), the sliding protrusion 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, reaching the state shown in FIG. 30(a). During this time, since the inner circumferential surface of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 moves from the rotating arm No driving force is transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upwardly spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

That is, while the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. maintained. Note that in this embodiment, the length during which the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protrusion portion 541b is maintained in the same position is the period during which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn. There is no need to be limited to that. The length for which the front plate member 546 remains in the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)) of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than in this embodiment, the length during which the front plate member 546 continues to be placed in the lower position can be made longer than in this embodiment.

From the state of FIG. 30(a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), it is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T5 (T5>T4). ), the sliding protrusion 574 pushes up the selection wall 553d of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is placed at a position vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2>h3). (See FIG. 30(b)). During this time, the inner circumferential surfaces of the irregularly shaped elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and come into contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ).

That is, when the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the selection wall portion 553d and the sliding protrusion 574 come into contact with each other, so that the rotating arm member The driving force is transmitted to 550 (transmission area).

From the state shown in FIG. 30(b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), it is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T6 (T6>T5). ), the sliding protrusion 574 enters the region of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 facing the first non-transmission wall 553b, and the protrusion 541 moves vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1>h2). A state is reached in which they are placed at separate positions (see FIG. 31). During this time, the inner circumferential surfaces of the irregularly shaped elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and come into contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ).

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 28(a) is reached. During this time, since the inner circumferential surface of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 moves from the rotating arm No driving force is transmitted to member 550 (non-transmission region).

Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. . In this case, the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, thereby restricting the swinging of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG.

Here, one possible method for stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state shown in FIG. 31 is to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the operating speed of the rotating arm member 550 is kept high until just before reaching the retracted position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second drive device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is gradually reduced. If you do so, you will not be able to improve the production effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotating crank member 570 is not stopped in the state shown in FIG. 31, but is rotated to the state shown in FIG. 28(a), so that the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. Can be done. As a result, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member 570 is decelerated from the state shown in FIG. 31 to the state shown in FIG. 28(a). can be done. Therefore, there is no need to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, it is possible to both improve the performance effect of the telescopic performance device 540 linked to the rotating arm member 550 and improve the durability of the second drive device 560.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotating crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotating arm member 550 can be reciprocated between the retracted position and the extended position.

From these facts, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b reaches the reference horizontal line in half the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position spaced vertically upward from O by a distance h1 to a position spaced apart a distance h3 (h3<h1). During a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation period, the protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically upwardly spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3, and during a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation period, the protrusion 541b is maintained at a position vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O. It is moved upward from a position vertically upwardly spaced apart by a distance h3 to a position spaced apart by a distance h1 (h1>h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the extending/contracting effect device 540 in the extending/contracting direction) can be doubled.

Here, in the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), and the rotating arm member 550 is extended. In this position, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal position (see FIG. 29(a)). Note that the downward orthogonal state can be formed by rotating the rotating crank member 570 by a predetermined amount clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 29(a).

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the extended position, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by half a turn (180 degrees). Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotating arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the extended position (from FIG. 28(a) to FIG. 29(a) ) and the time required for swinging from the extended position to the retracted position (see FIG. 29(a) through FIG. 31 to FIG. 28(a)) can be made equal.

The relationship between the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570, illustrating the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in chronological order. 32 to 35 illustrate a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated with hidden lines and are expanded and contracted. A front plate member 546 and a protrusion 541b of the production device 540 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

In addition, in FIG. 32(a), the above-mentioned upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position), and in FIGS. 32(b) to 35, the rotating arm A state in which the member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount is sequentially illustrated in chronological order.

In the state shown in FIG. 32(a), the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the protrusion 541b is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 32(a) (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a))), the sliding The protrusion 574 is moved through the area facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, and reaches the state shown in FIG. 32(b). During this time, since the inner circumferential surface of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 moves from the rotating arm No driving force is transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upwardly spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. Ru. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 32(b).

From the state of FIG. 32(b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12>T11). ), as shown in FIG. 33(a), the sliding protrusion 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, in the margin D from the state shown in FIG. 32(b) until the sliding protrusion 574 crosses the first non-transmission wall 553b and reaches the second non-transmission wall 553c, the rotating arm member 550 No driving force is transmitted to (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is placed at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h4 (h4<h1).

From the state of FIG. 33(a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13>T12). ), as shown in FIG. 33(b), the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the second non-transmission wall 553c of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550, which swings downward under the action of gravity. Ru. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 33(b) to the state shown in FIG. 34(a), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). In the state shown in FIG. 33(b), the protrusion 541 is located at a distance vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h5 (h5<h4).

From the state of FIG. 33(b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)) clockwise by an angle T14 (T14≈90 degrees>T13). When rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is placed at a position vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3. The state is reached (see FIG. 34(a)). During this time, the inner circumferential surface of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 in the moving direction, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area).

Here, the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown from FIG. 32(b) to FIG. 34(a) and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown from FIG. 30(a) to FIG. Although the rotation direction of the movable crank member 570 is different, the rotation range (phase) of the rotary crank member 570 is the same.

In this case, in the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32(b) to 34(a), the inner periphery of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 is While the surfaces are not in contact with each other, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (non-transmission region), while in the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 30(a) to 31, the driving force is always , the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

Therefore, depending on the direction of rotation of the rotating crank member 570, the manner in which the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed. Thereby, by reversing the direction of rotation of the rotating crank member 570, two presentation modes of the rotating arm member 550 can be formed.

That is, in this embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIG. 32(a) and FIG. 34(a), the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise in the front view. When rotated, the rotating arm member 550 swings in free fall depending on the gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 (non-transmission region). On the other hand, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the rotating arm member 550 is swung at a speed that depends on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 (transmission region).

As a result, even if the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 is constant, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, the rotation when the rotary crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase Variations in the swinging speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

Further, since the variation in the swinging speed of the rotating arm member 550 is increased by the shape of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 (formation of the margin D), the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 is changed. Other members such as a changeover switch for making changes are not required, and member costs can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the margin D is formed on the pivot hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, compared to the case where the margin D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570, the sliding protrusion 574 passes through the margin D for a predetermined distance. The distance that the protrusion 541b moves downward can be increased. Therefore, while suppressing the formation range of the margin D of the rotating crank member 570, it is possible to make the change in the operation of the rotating arm member 550 noticeable when the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed.

From the state of FIG. 34(a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15>T14). ), the sliding protrusion 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 34(b) is reached. During this time, since the inner circumferential surface of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 moves from the rotating arm No driving force is transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upwardly spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. Pushed. In this case, since the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 34(b).

From the state of FIG. 34(b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in front view (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)) clockwise by an angle T16 (T16≒180 degrees>T15). 35(a), the sliding protrusion 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553. During this time, since the inner circumferential surface of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 moves from the rotating arm No driving force is transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position vertically upwardly spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

From the state of FIG. 35(a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17>T16). ), the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is placed at a position vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2>h3) (Fig. 35 (see (b)). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

Here, when the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 and the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 are always linked, it is difficult to shift the starting timings of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550. . Therefore, when starting the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550, it is necessary to generate a large force corresponding to the rigidity of the force that overcomes the inertia of each member. Therefore, a drive device with a large driving force is required, and there is a risk that the drive device will become larger.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the starting timings of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 can be staggered. That is, for example, from the state of FIG. 34(b) to the state of FIG. 35(a), only the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, and from the state of FIG. 35(a) to the state of FIG. 35(b) is rotated. By interlocking with the rotating crank member 570, the rotating arm member 550 can be started.

Thereby, the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used to start the rotating arm member 550, so the driving force required for the second drive device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the second drive device 560 can be downsized.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 35(b), the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a, and the state shown in FIG. 32(a) is reached. During this time, the inner circumferential surfaces of the irregularly shaped elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and come into contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From these facts, when rotating the rotating crank member 570 clockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the protrusion 541b reaches the reference point in a period of 1/4 of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position spaced vertically upward from the horizontal line O by a distance h1 to a position spaced apart a distance h3 (h3<h1). During a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation period, the protrusion 541b is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3, and during a period of half of the subsequent rotation period, the protrusion 541b is vertically moved away from the reference horizontal line O. It is moved upward from a position spaced apart by a distance h3 upward to a position spaced apart by a distance h1 (h1>h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the extending/contracting effect device 540 in the extending/contracting direction) can be doubled.

Further, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially increased by the gravitational acceleration when moving downward, and on the other hand, the moving speed is constantly in line with the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 when moving upward. be done. Thereby, the mode of speed change of the protrusion 541b (telescopic effect device 540) can be changed depending on the direction of movement of the protrusion 541b (telescopic effect device 540).

With reference to FIG. 36, a change in the distance of the protrusion 541b (extension/contraction effect device 540) from the reference horizontal line O when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise will be described.

FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28(a)). In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the horizontal axis shows the swing angle in a manner that increases to the right from the left end at the upper orthogonal state of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)), and the vertical axis , the distance of the protrusion 541b from the reference horizontal line O is shown.

In FIG. 36, the distance of the projection 541b from the reference horizontal line O when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise is shown by a curve CC1, and when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise, the distance from the reference horizontal line O is shown by a curve CC1. The distance of the protrusion 541b from the reference horizontal line O is indicated by a curve CW1. Note that the curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusion 541b shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, respectively, and for comparison of each curve when the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase, A curve obtained by horizontally inverting the curve CC1 is illustrated as a curve CC2 using an imaginary line. By comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, as described above, the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, thereby changing the rising speed and descending speed of the protrusion 541b that is vertically moved by the rotating arm member 550. Can be done.

As a comparison target for the curve CW1, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise, the sliding protrusion 574 does not rotate until it comes into contact with the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 28(a)). A case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) is arranged at the retracted position is illustrated by a broken line as a curve CW2. Note that this corresponds to a case where the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) that causes the rotating arm member 550 to swing upward is set to be large. In this case, the period during which the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position can be made longer.

In the curves CC1 and CW1, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 ( (see FIG. 28(a)), a non-transmission region where driving force is not transmitted is formed. Note that the width of this angular range N1 can be adjusted by the width of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)).

Also, in curve CW1, the angle at which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) comes into contact with the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 (see FIG. 28(a)) of the rotating arm member 550 In the range N2, a non-transmission area is formed in which the driving force is not transmitted between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550. Note that the width of this angular range N2 can be adjusted by the width of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28(a)).

As shown in FIG. 36, between angle T11 and angle T14, which is the case where the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) is arranged in the same phase, and between angle T4 and angle T6, the curve The shapes of CW1 and curve CC1 are different (curve CW1 and curve CC2, which is the horizontally reversed curve CC1, do not overlap).

That is, when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) rotates between the angle T4 and the angle T6 in a manner that lifts the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)), the angle 11 to angle T14, the curve is gentler than when the rotating crank member 570 rotates in a manner that pushes down the rotating arm member 550.

This is because, in curve CW1, the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28(a)) comes into contact with the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 28(a)) of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) 28(a)) is rotated, and in the curve CC1, the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the selection wall 553d (see FIG. 28(a)) of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. Depends on the situation.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 28(a). As described above, in the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the circular arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the forming angle with the circular arc S1 is small). The right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is formed in such a manner that it intersects the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the angle formed between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1. Ru.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the amount of swinging of the rotating arm member 550 required to correspond to the amount of change changes. That is, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount with the sliding projection 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d in contact with each other, the amount of swing of the rotating arm member 550 is , is smaller than the amount of rocking of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transferring wall 553c change by a predetermined amount in a state where they are in contact with each other.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even if the rotary crank members 570 are rotated at a constant speed, depending on the rotation direction of the rotary crank members 570, when the rotary crank members 570 are arranged in the same phase. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

Although FIGS. 28 to 35 have described the case where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in one direction, it is also possible to reverse the direction of rotation of the rotating crank member 570 midway through. The timing for reversing the rotational direction of the rotating crank member 570 is when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed facing the first non-transmission wall 553b (for example, as shown in FIGS. 28(a), 31, and 32(a)). and FIG. 32(b), the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed facing the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (for example, FIG. 29(a), (See FIGS. 29(b), 34(b), and 35(a), the rotating arm member 550 is disposed in the extended position).

In this case, since the rotating arm member 550 is not in contact with the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, the resistance applied from the rotating arm member 550 to the rotating crank member 570 when the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed is reduced. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a position detection sensor (not shown) is provided to detect whether the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position or in the extended position. The rotational direction of the rotating crank member 570 can be easily controlled to be reversed when the moving arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position or the extended position.

By reversing the rotational direction of the rotating crank member 570, variations in the vertical reciprocating motion of the telescopic effect device 540 can be increased.

For example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position (see FIG. 28(a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated half a turn counterclockwise (see FIG. 29(a)), and then rotated. An example is a case in which the direction of rotation of the movable crank member 570 is reversed and the movable crank member 570 is rotated half a circle clockwise, thereby disposing the rotary arm member 550 in the retracted position (see FIG. 28(a)). That is, this is a case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves from a position vertically upwardly a distance h1 from the reference horizontal line O to a distance h3 (h3<h1 ) to a position separated by In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along a curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis ranges from 0 degrees to 180 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b moves from a position vertically upwardly spaced by a distance h3 from the reference horizontal line O to a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1>h3) during a period of half the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis ranges from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

As a result, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 moves downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and moves upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). It is possible to make the same period as the

Further, for example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position (see FIG. 32(a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn clockwise (see FIG. 34(a)). Then, the rotational direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed and the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn counterclockwise, thereby illustrating a case where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (FIG. 32 (see (a)). That is, this is a case where the sliding protrusion 574 moves on the side closer to the shaft support hole 552.

In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves from a position vertically upwardly spaced by a distance h1 from the reference horizontal line O to a distance h3 (h3 It moves downward to a position separated by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along a curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis ranges from 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b is moved away from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1>h3) from a position vertically upwardly spaced from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 during a period of 1/4 of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up to the position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis ranges from 270 degrees to 360 degrees.

As a result, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and raised by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The period during which the sliding protrusion 574 is moved can be made the same, and the predetermined period can be made shorter than when the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the pivot hole 552.

Furthermore, when the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 moves downward, it can partially fall freely (from angle T11 to angle T13), while the protrusion 541b of the elastic effect device 540 moves upward. In this case, it is always moved at a speed consistent with the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, even if the rotating speeds of the rotating crank members 570 are the same, the movement mode of the telescopic effect device 540 when the rotating crank members 570 are arranged in the same phase depends on the moving direction of the protrusion 541b of the elastic effect device 540 ( The degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from angle T11 to angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

Next, the difference in the swing angle due to the difference in the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 will be explained. First, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms an expanded state will be explained.

37 to 39 are front views of the composite operation unit 500. Note that FIGS. 37 to 39 illustrate a case where the telescopic effect device 540 forms an extended state (a case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the extended position). Further, FIG. 37 shows a state in which the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft part 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. A state in which the protrusion 541 is moved counterclockwise in the front view is illustrated, and FIG. 39 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in the front view from the state in FIG. 37. Note that the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. 29(a). Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position spaced apart upwardly from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

As illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 39, when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in the expanded state, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is formed in an arc shape centered on the first shaft portion 512, and the rotation Along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554 of the arm member 550. In other words, the arcuate hole 554 extends along the swing locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner surface of the arcuate hole 554 is not disposed facing the swinging direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arcuate hole 554 does not function as a stopper for stopping the swinging of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the swing of the rotating plate 520 is restricted. That is, the rotating plate 520 can swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper part 518c, the protruding part 541b can swing counterclockwise in front view up to the swinging angle θ1, and the rotating plate 520 can swing until it comes into contact with the second stopper part 518c. It is possible to swing until it comes into contact with the stopper part 518b, and the projection part 541b is allowed to swing clockwise in front view up to a swing angle θ2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, when the protrusion 541b is swung to the left in front view at a swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. In this case, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is moved in the expansion/contraction direction independently from the rotating arm member 550, and the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554, which may cause malfunction.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, even when the protrusion 541b is spaced apart from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the first raised fastening part 541c and the guide fastening part 541e of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 are connected to the rotating arm member. 550, the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned. That is, it is possible to prevent the telescopic effect device 540 from being moved in the telescopic direction independently of the rotating arm member 550.

Thereby, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the problem that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. Thereby, the arrangement area of the rotating arm member 550 can be suppressed, and the arrangement area of other movable members can be secured accordingly. Further, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

Furthermore, when the rotating arm member 550 swings with the protrusion 541b spaced apart from the arcuate hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 shifts, and the protrusion 541b becomes circular. It becomes difficult to return to the arcuate hole 554, which may cause malfunction. In contrast, in this embodiment, the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553, thereby preventing the swinging arm member 550 (see FIG. 39).

In addition, the movement locus of the point on the far side of the sliding protrusion 574 from the rotation axis (the farthest point from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 that comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574. (see FIG. 39), the rotating crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 39 while maintaining the attitude of the rotating arm member 550.

For example, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, immediately after the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the extended position (see FIG. 29(a) )), the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554 by the time the rotating crank member 570 is placed in the state shown in FIG. 30(a). think of. After the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554, even if the rotating crank member 570 is further rotated and the rotating arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. 30(b), the protrusion 541b There is no possibility that a malfunction will occur, such as being unable to return to the arcuate hole 554.

In this case, when swinging the rotating arm member 550 and the telescopic effect device 540, the rotating crank member 570 is controlled to stop or start in accordance with the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554. There is no need, and rotation of the rotating crank member 570 can be continued. In other words, the only thing that needs to be controlled is the timing of the swinging of the telescopic effect device 540, and there is no need to control the rotating crank member 570, and it is sufficient to keep it rotating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the burden of controlling the complicated operation of swinging the telescopic effect device 540 and the rotating arm member 550 at different timings.

In this embodiment, a tip portion 554a is formed in which the width of the arcuate hole 554 increases as it goes toward the opening end of the arcuate hole 554 (the left end in FIG. 39). As a result, it is possible to tolerate a large amount of displacement when the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554 (positional displacement in the expansion and contraction direction of the expansion/contraction production device 540), and the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e are A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be ensured.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state between the expanded state and the contracted state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state in which the telescopic effect device 540 is in the extended state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b moves in correspondence with the arcuate hole 554, thereby creating a telescopic effect. Device 540 forms an intermediate state.

40 to 42 are front views of the composite operation unit 500. Note that FIGS. 40 to 42 illustrate a case where the telescopic effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (a case where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed between the extended position and the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in the expanded state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the rocking locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction.

Further, FIG. 40 shows a state in which the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft part 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. A state in which the protrusion 541 is moved counterclockwise in the front view is illustrated, and FIG. 42 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in the front view from the state in FIG. 40.

Note that the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position spaced apart upwardly from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is moved in conjunction with the upward movement of the arcuate hole 554 due to the swinging of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both the function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and the function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546, as will be described later. This makes it possible to centralize functions.

As illustrated in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state have a radius of curvature. The central axes of both coincide at the top, but the radius of curvature and orientation are different. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 intersect at the forming angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arcuate hole 554 acts as a stopper to stop the swing of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). .

As shown in FIG. 41, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b does not come into contact with the arcuate hole 554. That is, since the rotary plate 520 is allowed to swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the projection 541b is allowed to swing counterclockwise in front view up to the swing angle θ3 (angle θ3= Angle θ1).

As shown in FIG. 42, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b comes into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554. In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550, and the state change of the telescopic effect device 540 in the direction of expansion and contraction is prevented, so that the telescopic effect device 540 can be swung in the state shown in FIG. movement is stopped.

That is, the rotary plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can be swung clockwise as viewed from the front up to the swiveling angle θ4 (angle θ4<angle θ2). . Therefore, depending on the state of the expansion/contraction direction of the expansion/contraction effect device 540, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed. Thereby, by varying the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction performance device 540, variations in the swing angle of the expansion/contraction performance device 540 can be increased. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the main body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state will be explained. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state in which the telescopic effect device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), the protrusion 541b moves in accordance with the arcuate hole 554, thereby creating a telescopic effect. Device 540 forms a reduced state.

43 to 45 are front views of the composite operation unit 500. Note that FIGS. 43 to 45 illustrate a case where the telescopic effect device 540 forms a contracted state (a case where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the rocking locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction.

Further, FIG. 43 shows a state in which the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft part 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. A state in which the protrusion 541 is moved counterclockwise in the front view is illustrated, and FIG. 45 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in the front view from the state in FIG. 43. Note that the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. 28(a). Therefore, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position spaced apart upwardly from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is moved in conjunction with the upward movement of the arcuate hole 554 due to the swinging of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both the function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and the function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546. This makes it possible to centralize functions.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the telescopic effect device 540 is in the contracted state and the shape of the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 are different from each other, The central axis of the radius of curvature is reversed. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swing locus of the projection 541b is located below the projection 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arcuate hole 554 is located above the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 intersect at a forming angle α2 (angle α2>angle α1), and the arcuate hole 554 acts as a stopper to stop the swing of the protrusion 541b ( (See FIGS. 44 and 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b comes into contact with the second stopper surface 554c of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotary plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the protrusion 541b is allowed to oscillate counterclockwise in front view up to a swiveling angle θ5. (Angle θ5<Angle θ1=Angle θ3).

As shown in FIG. 45, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b comes into contact with the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protruding portion 541b is allowed to oscillate clockwise in front view up to a swiveling angle θ6 (angle θ6<angle θ4). <Angle θ2). Therefore, depending on the state of the expansion/contraction direction of the expansion/contraction effect device 540, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed. Thereby, variations in the swing width of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be increased.

Here, the formation angle α2 between the movement trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the reduced state is larger than the formation angle α1 between the movement trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the intermediate state. Ru.

In the relationship between the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the protrusion 541b will swing in a manner that crosses the arc-shaped hole 554, and the protrusion 541b The swing angle of is assumed to be the minimum. On the other hand, in the relationship between the rocking locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554, if the formation angle is 0 degrees (see FIGS. 37 to 39), the protrusion 541b will move along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is maximized. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1<formation angle α2). ).

As described above, by changing the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540, the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b is changed, and at that time, the inner circumferential surface of the arcuate hole 554 (the first stopper surface 554b, the second The stopper surface 554c and the third stopper surface 554d) function as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion/contraction production device 540. Thereby, the inner circumferential surface of the arcuate hole 554 can be used as a portion that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion and contraction state of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is different. Therefore, the space for arranging a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be reduced.

Further, the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the telescopic presentation device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by placing the rotating arm member 550 in the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where a fixed stopper is provided on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the stopper remains on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 even when the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position. can be prevented. As a result, when the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the retracted position, other members can be placed in front of the third symbol display device 81, so other movable members (for example, the slide operation unit 700 It is possible to secure an overhang space for the support column member 720).

Further, the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 functions as a stopper for regulating the swinging angle of the telescopic effect device 540, and by swinging the rotating arm member 550, the elastic effect device 540 is driven to a second drive. It has a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion and contraction effect device 540 to perform expansion and contraction operations. This makes it possible to consolidate functions and reduce the number of parts.

The tilting unit 600 and the sliding unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. The tilting operation unit 600 is a unit that swings (tilts) the presentation member 620 (see FIG. 12), and the slide operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilting operation unit 600 in the left-right direction. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. Note that FIGS. 46 and 47 illustrate a state in which the support members 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are disposed at the retracted position.

48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. Note that in FIGS. 48 and 49, the tilting operation unit 600 is shown without being disassembled for easy understanding.

The slide operation unit 700 includes a base member 710 formed in a plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and one end of the base member 710 is fastened and fixed to a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 so that it can slide in the left-right direction. a support member 720; a slide rail 730 having one end fastened and fixed to the support support member 720 and the other end to which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed, the slide rail 730 being formed to be expandable and retractable in the vertical direction; A connecting member 740 that is formed to be slidable on the rear rail portion 716 of the main body portion 710 and is pivotally supported by the pivoting protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a driving force for moving the support member 720 in the left-right direction is generated. It mainly includes a drive device 750 and a back cover member 760 formed on the back side of the drive device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710.

The base member 710 is a member that forms the skeleton of the slide operation unit 700, and includes a slide plate 711 that is formed to be slidable in the left-right direction and to which a support member 720 is fastened and fixed from the back side, and a rear view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 is recessed in the lower left portion with a circular cross section and in which the fixed shaft portion 753a is supported, and a shaft support hole 712 is recessed in the lower right portion of the base member 710 in the shape of an elongated hole and extends in the left-right direction. 712 and a slide shaft support hole 713 in which the moving shaft portion 754a is slidably supported, and a locking portion 725 of the column member 720 that is formed to be vertically swingable by a solenoid in the left-right direction. a lever member 714 that restricts the movement of the base member 710; a front rail portion 715 that is provided at the upper end of the base member 710 and has a downwardly arcuate cross section projecting toward the front side and on which the upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740 rolls; The rail portion 715 mainly includes a back rail portion 716 which is recessed from the back side and has an arcuate cross section and into which the insertion plate portion 741b of the connecting member 740 is inserted.

Since the lever member 714 restricts the sliding movement of the column member 720 fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711 in the left-right direction, the driving force of the drive device 750 to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position is not required. Can be done.

Here, in this embodiment, since the tilting operation unit 600 is moved along the direction in which the front rail section 715 and the rear rail section 716 are formed (arc trajectory), the left and right sides of the support member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 are moved. The sliding movement in the direction may occur due to the effect of gravity applied to the tilting motion unit 600. For example, when the tilting unit 600 is placed in the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the direction of movement of the tilting unit 600 is directed diagonally downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715. Therefore, even if the direction of movement of the support member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is in the left-right direction along the movement direction of the slide plate 711, there is a possibility that the support member 720 may be moved due to gravity. In the present embodiment, when the lever member 714 is swung downward, it is engaged with the locking portion 725 of the column member 720, and the movement of the column member 720 in the left and right direction is restricted, so that the driving force of the drive device 750 is Even if it is not necessary, the support member 720 can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the drive device 750 can be improved.

The support member 720 includes a main body part 721 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 that is connected to the lower end of the main body part 721 in the left-right direction and is bored in the front-rear direction. A first fastening part 722 into which a screw is inserted is inserted, and a second fastening part 722 is connected to the left end of the main body part 721 in the front view and is bored in the front-rear direction and into which the slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed. 723 , a slide hole 724 which is an elongated hole extending in a direction parallel to the direction in which the second fastening portion 723 is connected, and is formed on the right side of the main body 721 when viewed from the front; A lower lid portion in which the belt 755 of the drive device 750 is sandwiched between a hook-shaped locking portion 725 that projects upward from the lower end and engages with the lever member 714, and the main body portion 721 that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main body portion 721. 726 , a rolling part 727 that protrudes from the back side of the lower end of the main body part 721 and is formed to be able to roll on the inner circumferential surface of the slide recessed part 764 of the back cover member 760 ; It mainly includes a coil spring 728 suspended downward and forward and connected to the hook-shaped part 617 of the base member 610 at the lower end.

The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support member 720 in a posture that allows it to expand and contract in the direction in which the second fastening portion 723 is connected.

The slide hole 724 is a long hole that extends in a direction parallel to the direction in which the second fastening portions 723 are connected, and is a long hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can suppress a deviation in the posture of the tilting unit 600 that moves up and down in the left-right direction (relative rotation of the tilting unit 600 with respect to the support member 720).

The lower lid portion 726 has a tooth shape extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile has a shape that meshes with a tooth profile formed on the inner circumferential surface of the belt 755 of the drive device 750. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the support member 720 from slipping with respect to the belt 755 of the drive device 750.

The rolling portion 727 is inserted into the slide recess 764 of the back cover 760 so as to be able to roll, thereby suppressing frictional resistance and suppressing inclination in the front-rear direction about the lower end of the column member 720. be able to.

The coil spring 728 is a biasing force that moves the tilting unit 600 upward. Since the biasing force from the coil spring 728 is constantly applied to the tilting unit 600, the tilting unit 600 is prevented from falling downward due to gravity.

The connecting member 740 includes a triangular plate-shaped main body member 741 that is rotatably supported by the pivot protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600, and a base that is supported by a rolling shaft 741c that projects from the main body member 741. A pair of cylindrical upper rolling members 742 roll on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and are fastened and fixed to the rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. A front cover member 743 is disposed at the lower part of the back side of the front cover member 743, the lower half is fitted onto the front cover member 743, and the upper half rolls on the lower surface of the front rail section 715. It mainly includes a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 that is moved.

The main body member 741 is a member formed in a triangular plate shape, and is a circular depression recessed from the back side at the upper end thereof, and has a shaft rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600. A branch 741a, an insertion plate part 741b which is a plate-shaped member protruding from the lower end toward the front side and is slidably inserted into the rear rail part 716 of the base member 710, and an insertion plate part 741b from the shaft support 741a. It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c that project in a cylindrical shape toward the front side from positions symmetrical to the perpendicular line drawn to 741b, and on which the upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported.

Since the insertion plate portion 741b is inserted through the back rail portion 716 of the base member 710, the connecting member 740 is formed to be movable along the back rail portion 716. Therefore, the tilting operation unit 600 supported by the pivot support 741a is also formed to be movable along the back rail portion 716.

A pair of rolling shafts 741c are formed at positions symmetrical to a perpendicular drawn from the shaft support 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c come into contact with the front rail part 715 formed in an arc shape via the upper rolling part 742, the load ( The force in the normal direction of the arc) passes through the shaft support 741a. Therefore, the pivoting protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stably held by the connecting member 740.

The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft support 741a, and is brought into contact with the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail part 715, the upper rolling part 742 is rolled on the upper surface of the front rail part 715. Thereby, the frictional resistance that occurs when the connecting member 740 slides can be reduced, and the driving force required for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

The lower rolling member 744 has its lower half rotatably fitted onto the lower part of the front cover member 743 and its upper end abuts against the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 . That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail part 715, the lower rolling part 744 is rolled on the lower surface of the front rail part 715. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 when the connecting member 740 slides, and to suppress the driving force required for the sliding movement.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail section 715, and the lower rolling member 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail section 715. Thereby, it is possible to maintain the state in which the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744 of the connecting member 740 while suppressing frictional resistance.

Here, since the center of gravity of the tilting operation unit 600 is formed upward as described later, there is a possibility that the tilting operation unit 600 will tilt in the front-back direction. In this case, the connecting member 740 sandwiches the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 with the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744, so that the connecting member 740 is prevented from tilting in both the front and rear directions of the tilting unit 600. , can generate a resistance force. Thereby, the attitude of the tilting operation unit 600 can be easily maintained.

The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740, thereby pivotally supporting the upper rolling member 742 so that it cannot be pulled out.

The drive device 750 includes a drive motor 751 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and generates a drive force that slides the column member 720, a drive gear 752 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 751, and a drive gear 752 that is connected to the drive gear 752. A shaft fixed gear 753 meshed with each other and around which a belt 755 is wound; and a shaft moving gear 754 which is arranged apart from the shaft fixed gear 753 and around which a belt 755 is wound and a rotary shaft 754a is slidably movable. , a belt 755 that is wrapped around the fixed shaft gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 and is moved by the rotation of the fixed shaft gear 753, and a coil that generates a biasing force that moves the shaft moving gear 754 in a direction away from the fixed shaft gear 753. It mainly includes a spring 756.

The shaft fixed gear 753 is a cylindrical member serving as a rotating shaft, and includes a fixed shaft portion 753a that is inserted into the shaft support hole 712 of the base member 710. Further, the shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754a that is a cylindrical member serving as a rotating shaft and is inserted into the slide shaft support hole 713 of the base member 710.

The shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. The inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 is formed with tooth profiles that mesh with the gear teeth of the fixed shaft gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754. Thereby, slippage between the belt 755 and the fixed shaft gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the amount of rotation of the fixed shaft gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755.

The coil spring 756 has one end fixed to a hook-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710 in rear view, and the other end fixed to a case covering the shaft moving gear 754. . As a result, it is possible to generate a biasing force that moves the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft support hole 712, and it is possible to apply an appropriate tension to the belt 755, so that the belt 755 can move the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear. Falling off from the gear 754 can be prevented.

The back cover member 760 is a member that covers the drive device 750 on the back side of the base member 710, and includes a main body part 761 formed in a box shape with an open front side, and a fixed shaft part 753a on the bottom surface of the main body part 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a receiving recess, a moving recessed portion 763 that is a recess that extends in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and receives the moving shaft portion 754a, and a moving recessed portion 763 that extends in the left-right direction and receives the rolling portion 727. It mainly includes a slide concave portion 764 which is a depression.

The sliding recessed portion 764 is a recess on which the rolling portion 727 rolls on its upper and lower inner surfaces. This suppresses the frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the column member 720, and also suppresses the column member 720 from tilting in the front-rear direction. That is, when the support member 720 is tilted in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 comes into contact with either the upper inner surface or the lower inner surface of the slide recessed portion 764. Thereby, tilting of the support member 720 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Next, the tilting operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a back exploded perspective view of the tilting unit 600.

The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-shaped base member 610 fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, a box-shaped presentation member 620 whose lower end is swingably supported on the base member 610, A first drive device 630 that generates a driving force for swinging the effect member 620, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first drive device 630 to the effect member 620, and a transmission member 640 that comes into contact with the transfer member 640 to transmit the driving force. It mainly includes a torsion spring 650 that generates a biasing force that moves the member 640, and a second drive device 660 that generates a driving force that opens and closes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the presentation member 620. .

The base member 610 includes a main body part 611 to which a slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed and formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a shaft support of a connecting member 740 which is provided in a cylindrical shape and protrudes from the front side of the main body part 611. 741a is pivotally supported, and a circular hole is bored in the front-rear direction vertically above the shaft supporting projection 612, and the swing shaft 626 of the production member 620 is pivotably supported. A first shaft support hole 613, which is a circular hole bored in the front-rear direction vertically above the first shaft support hole 613, and a second shaft support hole in which the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is swingably supported. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body part 611 and inserted into the slide hole 724 of the support member 720 so as to be able to slide up and down, and an insertion hole into which the drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted. 616, and a hook-shaped hook portion 617 extending from the lower end of the main body portion 611 toward the back side.

The second shaft support hole 614 includes a lower receiving plate portion 614a that projects from its lower edge toward the front side with an arcuate cross section. The rotation of the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is guided by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. Note that the lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed with a left-right width that is approximately the same length as the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 642 (see FIG. 53(a)).

By inserting the auxiliary member 615 into the slide hole 724, tilting of the base member 610 in the left-right direction can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid in the vertical direction.

The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion on which one end of the coil spring 728 is applied and a biasing force is applied.

With reference to FIG. 52, the presentation member 620 and the second drive device 660 will be described. FIG. 52 is a front exploded perspective view of the production member 620 and the second drive device 660. Note that the liquid crystal device disposed inside the presentation member 620 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate for explanation of the presentation member 620 and the second drive device 660.

The presentation member 620 is a box-shaped member in which a liquid crystal device is disposed, and includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body member 621 and a structure that extends forward from the top and bottom of the main body member 621 and covers the main body member 621. A bendable upper and lower cover member 622, a left and right cover member 623 that is a plate-like member that is attached to both sides of the upper and lower cover member 622, and forms a rectangular box shape with an open front end together with the upper and lower cover member 622; A first curtain member 624 that is a member that opens and closes the opening and is connected to the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660 and moves; and a first curtain member that is a member that opens and closes the front opening together with the first curtain member 624. It mainly includes a second curtain member 625 that is moved by being pulled by the curtain member 624, and a cylindrical swing shaft portion 626 that protrudes from the lower back surface of the main body member 621, and has a center of gravity position G (FIG. 53). ) is formed above (at a higher position) than the swing shaft portion 626. Note that the center of gravity position G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

The main body member 621 includes a cylindrical sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that is vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 and protrudes toward the back side. The sliding shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that accommodate the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the drive device 660. .

The left and right cover members 623 include a slide groove 623a formed in the shape of a groove on the inner surface and into which the slide protrusion 625c of the second curtain member 625 can slide.

In the slide groove 623a, a curved groove formed in an arc shape is connected to the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. As a result, the second curtain member 625 is slid along the shape of the slide groove 623a in such a manner that linear movement and curved movement occur sequentially.

The first curtain member 624 is a member that swings vertically around the opening/closing shaft 664 of the second drive device 660, and includes a main body portion 624a having a C-shaped cross section and a bent plate material. A fitting part 624b that protrudes in the left-right direction from the end of the second drive device 660 and is fitted in a relatively non-rotatable manner to the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660, and one end near the fitting part 624b is connected to the main body. 624, and the other end thereof is connected to the connecting protrusion 625b of the second curtain member 625.

The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and moved in the vertical direction, and includes a main body portion 625a formed in a plate shape with a C-shaped cross section, and a main body portion 625a with a C-shaped cross section of the main body portion 624a. A connecting protrusion 625b that protrudes from the end in the left-right direction and is connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left and right cover members 623 that protrudes outward in the left-right direction from near the bent portion of the main body 625a. It mainly includes a slide protrusion 625c that is inserted into the slide protrusion 623a.

The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the production member 620, a drive gear 662 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear that is meshed with the drive gear 662 and mutually A pair of transmission gears 663 that rotate in opposite directions, and an opening/closing shaft that is inserted through the transmission gears 663 so as not to be relatively rotatable and is rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the production member 620 by a shaft support mechanism (not shown). 664, and a transmission member 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of opening/closing shafts 664 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

The transmission member 665 includes a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to be relatively rotatable. As a result, the first curtain member 624 is swung up and down about the opening/closing shaft 664.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 50 and 51. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 whose drive shaft is inserted into the insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 which is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631. , and a worm wheel 633 in the shape of a helical gear that meshes with the worm 632.

The worm 632 is formed with a double thread. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, so the worm wheel 633 rotates once while the worm 632 rotates 10 times. Thereby, the rotation angle of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be significantly reduced when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution.

The worm wheel 633 has a locking protrusion 633a that projects from the center of the rotating shaft, is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610, and is locked to the cylindrical portion 643 of the transmission member 640 in a relatively non-rotatable manner. Be prepared. Note that the transmission of driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is structurally limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 actively rotates, the force is transmitted to the worm wheel 633). 632 in the axial direction). Thereby, the load that the drive motor 631 receives when stopping the worm wheel 633 can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped while the power of the drive motor 631 is cut off, and the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

Referring to FIG. 53, the transmission member 640 and torsion spring 650 will be described. 53(a) and 53(b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. In addition, in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), the external shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the explanation of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. do. Further, FIG. 53(a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and in this state, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is applied to the transmission member 640. Balanced in the direction of swing. FIG. 53(b) shows a state in which the transmission member 640 is swung a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the presentation member 620 is swung a predetermined amount from the inverted state of FIG. 53(a).

The transmission member 640 is a member that is swung by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50), and includes a main body 641 formed in the shape of an elongated rectangular rod, and a front and rear part at one end of the main body 641. A cylindrical portion 642 that extends in the direction and locks the locking protrusion 633a of the first drive device 630, and a length that extends in the axial radial direction of the cylindrical portion 642 at the other end of the main body portion 641. A sliding hole 643 formed as a hole, a contact portion 644 spaced apart on both sides of the main body portion 641 in the swinging direction, and a connecting portion between the contact portion 644 and the front side surface of the main body portion 641. It mainly includes a front arc plate part 645 having a wide arc shape, and a back arc plate part 646 having a wide arc shape that connects the abutting part 644 and the back side surface of the main body part 641.

As shown in FIG. 53, the contact portion 644, the front arcuate plate portion 645, and the rear arcuate plate portion 646 are disposed to surround the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. This can prevent the torsion spring 650 from falling off (separating) from the transmission member 640.

The cylindrical portion 642 is pivotally supported in the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked in a locking protrusion 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first drive device 630 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Ru.

The sliding shaft portion 621a of the presentation member 620 is inserted through the sliding hole 643. As a result, when the transmission member 640 is swung around the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620 While being slid (slidingly moved in the shaft radial direction) through the sliding hole 643, the effect member 620 is swung around the first shaft support hole 613.

By swinging the effect member 620 in this manner, it is possible to suppress the swing angle of the effect member 620 when rotating the drive motor 631 in the minimum unit of control resolution of the drive device. For example, as a method for swinging the effect member 620, a method of directly connecting a gear to the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor to the gear may also be considered. However, in this case, the minimum unit of resolution for controlling the drive motor is angle P0 (see FIG. 53(a); for ease of understanding, the angle is shown several times larger than the actual angle P0). The amount of movement X1 by which the center of gravity of the presentation member 620 is shifted from the inverted state in the left-right direction when the presentation member 620 is rotated in the inverted state becomes larger as the center of gravity of the presentation member 620 is separated from the swing shaft portion 626. Therefore, the more the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is separated from the swing shaft part 626, the more difficult it becomes to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the effect member 620, and the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is placed directly above the swing axis part 626. It becomes difficult to keep the effect member 620 still in this state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 is connected to the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. The length from this sliding shaft portion 621a to the cylindrical portion 642, which is the swing axis of the transmission member 640, is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626, which is the swing shaft of the production member 620. It is formed shorter than the .

Therefore, even if the production member 620 is long in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the minimum unit of resolution for control of the drive device is the angle P0 (see FIG. 53(a)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity of the effect member 620 when the drive device is operated at an angle several times larger than the actual angle P0. Therefore, it is possible to easily keep the movable member stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is located directly above the first axis.

Further, as a method for swinging the effect member 620, gear teeth are formed on the effect member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear that meshes with the gear teeth is rotated by a drive motor. A possible method is to swing the presentation member 620. However, in this case, as the swinging range of the effect member 620 becomes larger, the range in which the arcuate gear teeth are formed becomes larger in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Therefore, if the presentation member 620 is formed to have a narrow shape in the swinging direction, the gear teeth on the arc will protrude from the presentation member 620, which will impede the presentation effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the presentation member 620, the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swing shaft is the swing shaft portion 626 that is the swing shaft of the presentation member 620. , and is connected to the swing shaft portion 621a at the center of the presentation member 620 in the left-right direction. Since the production member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 relative to the swing range of the production member 620 can be suppressed to near the center of the production member 620 in the left-right direction. Thereby, even if the effect member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, it is possible to suppress the transmission member 640 from protruding from the effect member 620, and the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 can be improved.

The lower surface of the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620 is brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640. As a result, the weight of the presentation member 620 is applied not only to the swing shaft portion 626 but also to the transmission member 640. That is, a force opposing the weight of the presentation member 620 can be generated not only from the swing shaft portion 626 but also from the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported at two points, the swing shaft part 626 and the cylindrical part 642, and the radial force applied to the swing shaft part 626 and the cylindrical part 642 can be suppressed. .

Here, since the normal state of the production member 620 is the inverted state shown in FIG. is desirable.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53(b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. is swung at a swing angle φ2 (φ2<φ1).

That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is made smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 that swings by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53(a)).

Further, in this embodiment, an elongated sliding hole 643 is formed in the radial direction of the axis of the transmission member 640, and the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620 is inserted into the sliding hole 643. The transmission member 640 and the production member 620 have different swing axes, and the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620, so the transmission member 640 The more the transmission member 640 is swung, the more the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the swiveling shaft of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53(a)) is the same as the state in which the arm is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state (see FIG. 53(a)). The arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the presentation member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is shorter than that shown in FIG. 54(b)).

That is, the closer the inverted state is, the shorter the arm length of the transmission member 640 is, and when the transmission member 640 is swung at a predetermined angle, the swing angle of the presentation member 620 is determined by the length of the arm of the transmission member 640 being constant. Compared to the case of , it can be made smaller as it approaches the inverted state. Therefore, without changing the rotational speed of the drive motor 631, the operating speed of the effect member 620 is increased near a predetermined stop position, while the operating speed of the effect member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the effect member 620 is in an inverted position. (It is possible to easily control the effect member 620 to stop in a state where the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is arranged vertically above the first pivot hole 613.)

Referring to FIG. 55, the effect member 620 swings relative to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The change in angle will be explained.

FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the production member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53(a)). In FIG. 55, the rotation axis M1 corresponds to the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53(a)) that is the rotation shaft of the production member 620, and the rotation shaft M2 corresponds to the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53(a)). Straight lines a1 to a4 are schematic representations of the arrangement of the transmission member 640, and are straight lines drawn radially from the rotation axis M2, with the straight line a1 passing through the rotation axis M1, and the straight lines a2 to a4 connecting with the straight line a1. The formation angle is sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angles formed by adjacent straight lines a1 to a4 are 15 degrees each.

A circular arc drawn with a radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53(a)) centered on the rotation axis M2 is illustrated as a circular arc SR1, and an arm length R2 (see FIG. 54(b)) centered on the rotation axis M2. A circular arc drawn with a radius equal to is illustrated as circular arc SR2. Note that the arc SR0 is an arc drawn around the rotation axis M1, and has a radius equal to the arm length R1 plus the distance between the rotation axes M1 and M2.

These arcs assume the locus of the connection position between the production member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53(a)). In this embodiment, a sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53(a)) serving as a connecting position projects from the effect member 620, and the connecting position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. . In addition, in the case where the connection position between the production member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the circular arc SR1 or the circular arc SR2, a long elongated hole is formed in the production member 620 in the axial radial direction, and the connection position between the production member 620 and the transmission member 640 is It is assumed that the shaft inserted into the elongated hole is provided in a protruding manner.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the intersection of straight line a1 and circular arc SR0 is illustrated as intersection point P10, the intersection of straight line a1 and circular arc SR1 is illustrated as intersection point P11, and the intersection of straight line a1 and circular arc SR2 is illustrated as intersection point P12. Illustrated in

Similarly, the intersection of straight line a2 and circular arc SR0 is illustrated as intersection point P20, the intersection of straight line a2 and circular arc SR1 is illustrated as intersection point P21, and the intersection of straight line a2 and circular arc SR2 is illustrated as intersection point P22. The intersection of straight line a3 and circular arc SR0 is illustrated as intersection point P30, the intersection of straight line a3 and circular arc SR1 is illustrated as intersection point P31, and the intersection of straight line a3 and circular arc SR2 is illustrated as intersection point P32. The intersection of straight line a4 and circular arc SR0 is illustrated as intersection point P40, the intersection of straight line a4 and circular arc SR1 is illustrated as intersection point P41, and the intersection of straight line a4 and circular arc SR2 is illustrated as intersection point P42. Note that the intersection P10 and the intersection P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection P40 and the intersection P42 are arranged at the same position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P10 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P20 is illustrated as an angle A10, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P11 is An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21 is illustrated as an angle A11, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P12 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 is illustrated as an angle A12. be done.

Similarly, the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P20 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P30 is illustrated as an angle A20, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P21 and the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P31 An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P22 is illustrated as an angle A21, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P32 is illustrated as an angle A22. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P30 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P40 is illustrated as an angle A30, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P31 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection P41 An angle formed by these is illustrated as angle A31, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through rotation axis M1 and intersection P32 and a straight line passing through rotation axis M1 and intersection P42 is illustrated as angle A32. Note that these angles correspond to the swing angle of the presentation member 620.

Here, the ratio of (distance between rotation axis M1 and rotation axis M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is (1:2.32:2.54) in this embodiment. When the angles are actually measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the performance member 640 is largest when the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected along the arc SR0. , when the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected along the arc SR2 (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

Angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is oscillated between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the oscillation angle when the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected along the circular arc SR0 is the same as that along the circular arc SR2. This is lower than when the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between angle A22 and angle A20 is smaller than the difference between angle A20 and angle A21 (angle A20 is closer to angle A22 than angle A21).

Angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is oscillated between the straight line a2 and the straight line a1, the oscillation angle when the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected along the circular arc SR0 is the same as that along the circular arc SR1. This exceeds the case where the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between angle A12 and angle A10 is greater than the difference between angle A10 and angle A11 (angle A10 is closer to angle A11 than angle A12).

From these, by setting the locus of the connection position of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) to the circular arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 is swung at a constant speed, the effect member It can be seen that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. That is, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 is closer to the angular velocity (high speed side) when the locus of the connection position of the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 is the arc SR2, and when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a1. The angular velocity when disposed can be brought closer to the angular velocity (lower speed side) when the locus of the connection position of the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 is an arc SR1.

Further, when calculating the ratio of the respective angles, angle A22/angle A32 is 0.98, and angle A12/angle A22 is 0.99. Angle A21/Angle A31 is 0.98, and Angle A11/Angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the trajectory of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) is the circular arc SR1, SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung at a constant speed toward the inverted state. In this case, the deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

On the other hand, angle A20/angle A30 is 0.95, and angle A10/angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) is an arc SR0 (an arc centered on the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant speed. The deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the presentation member 620 when swung toward the state can be set to 3 to 5%. That is, compared to the case where the trajectory of the connection position is a circular arc SR1, SR2 (a circular arc centered on the rotation axis M2), the deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the presentation member 620 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), in the inverted state, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the presentation member 620 comes into contact with the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the presentation member 620 is formed vertically above the swinging shaft portion 626 of the presentation member 620 and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so that the force due to the gravity G of the presentation member 620 is applied to the swinging shaft. It is applied vertically downward to the portion 626 and the cylindrical portion 642. Therefore, the force component in the direction of swinging the presentation member 620 due to the gravity of the presentation member 620 is not generated, so even if the power of the first drive device 630 is cut off, the posture of the presentation member 620 can be maintained in an inverted state. Can be done. Thereby, the durability of the first drive device 630 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the force due to the gravity G of the presentation member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swing shaft portion 626 and the cylindrical portion 642, the rotational resistance of the swing shaft portion 626 and the cylindrical portion 642 can be increased. , it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the effect member 620 in an inverted state.

The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring that generates a biasing force in the direction of rewinding the coil portion 651 (the direction of pushing back the transmission member 640) as the transmission member 640 swings, and is A coil portion 651 wound around the circumference, a biasing arm portion 652 extending along both sides of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 in the swinging direction, an end of the coil portion 651, and an end of the biasing arm portion 652. It mainly includes a connecting arm part 653 that passes between the cylindrical part 642 and the swing shaft part 626 to connect the parts.

The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter approximately three times the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the presentation member 620. Therefore, when the biasing arm portion 652 swings and a load is generated that causes the coil portion 651 to undergo diameter reduction deformation, the amount of deformation of the coil portion 651 can be secured, and the biasing arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 are deformed. can suppress concentration.

The biasing arm portion 652 is surrounded by the main body portion 641, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640. Thereby, the biasing arm portion 652 can be prevented from falling off (separating) from the transmission member 640.

Further, the biasing arm portion 652 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the plane on which the transmission member 640 swings. Therefore, the biasing arm 652 disposed in the swinging direction of the transmission member 640 generates a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640, and the biasing arm disposed on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640 generates a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640. 652 is prevented from moving by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. As a result, the torsion spring 650 is configured to be able to generate a biasing force in a direction that pushes back the transmission member 640 regardless of the direction in which the transmission member 640 swings.

A bent portion 653a that is bent toward the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed at a connecting portion between the biasing arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653. In this case, as will be described later, the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650, thereby expanding the bent portion 653a (see FIG. 54(b)). As a result, the contact position between the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes farther from the cylindrical portion 642, and the moment loaded from the torsion spring 650 on the transmission member 640 increases. Can be done.

With reference to FIG. 54, changes in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 and pushing back the transmission member 640 will be described. 54(a) and 54(b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. In addition, in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the external shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and FIG. refer.

In addition, in FIG. 54(a), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 53(b), and the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side in the front view A state in which the transmission member 640 starts to be pressed against the inner surface is illustrated, and in FIG. 54(b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state in FIG. 54(a), and the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled. The extended state is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 54(a), a biasing force pushing back the transmission member 640 is generated in the biasing arm 652 on the left side of the torsion spring 650 when viewed from the front. This biasing force is the sum of the biasing force generated starting from the coil portion 651 and the biasing force generated starting from the bent portion 653a.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 53(b), the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the bent portion 653a located on the left side in front view of the pair of bent portions 653a, so that the biasing arm on the left side in front view of the torsion spring 650 In the portion 652, only a biasing force starting from the coil portion 651 is generated as a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 54(a), in addition to the biasing force starting from the coil portion 651, a biasing force is generated due to the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a. Therefore, the spring constant of the biasing arm portion 652 can be increased. Note that the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a has a shorter length than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so that the unit deformation amount of the transmission member 640 is reduced. The urging force generated by a hit can be made larger.

In the state shown in FIG. 54(b), the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pushed by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640, thereby widening the angle formed by the biasing arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653. Thereby, the contact position length L1, which is the distance between the contact position of the main body part 641 of the transmission member 640 and the biasing arm part 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the cylindrical part 642 in the state of FIG. Compared to this, the same contact position length L2 in the state shown in FIG. 54(b) is separated from the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. That is, the contact position length is extended. As a result, the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is lengthened, so that the moment loaded from the torsion spring 650 to the transmission member 640 can be increased.

Therefore, for example, if the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 is approximately the same in the state of FIG. 54(a) and the state of FIG. 54(b), in FIG. It is possible to increase the moment caused by Therefore, the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 can be pushed back more easily.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 pushing back the transmission member 640 is small when the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (direction member 620) from the retracted position is small, and is small when the swing angle is large. Indeed, it increases elastically, and increases beyond the elastic increase after the state shown in FIG. 54(a). Therefore, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 that is necessary when the production member 620 is at the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54(b)) is determined, and the torsion spring only increases elastically. When the swing angle is small, the biasing force can be set smaller (a softer spring can be used).

Thereby, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the operating speed of the presentation member 620 at the start of its swing is reduced by the biasing force of the torsion spring 650, and it is possible to increase the operation speed at the time the presentation member 620 starts its operation. .

Furthermore, since the biasing force is increased by more than the elastic increase after the state shown in FIG. The deceleration acceleration of the effect member 620 can be increased. Thereby, the timing at which the performance member 620 starts to be decelerated can be delayed during the swinging motion of the performance member 620. Therefore, the swinging angle at which the presentation member 620 can be swung at high speed can be expanded, and the presentation effect of the tilting operation unit 600 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 56, the sliding operations of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 56 is a front view of the tilting unit 600 and the sliding unit 700. Note that in FIG. 56, a state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is placed in the retracted position is illustrated by an imaginary line, and a state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position is illustrated in a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 56, a connecting member 740 connecting the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700, which are formed to be slidable in the vertical direction, is formed to be movable in the extending direction of the front rail section 715. . Here, since the weight of the tilting unit 600 is applied to the connecting member 740, when the tilting unit 600 is placed in the retracted position, the tilting unit 600 moves along the front rail portion 715 due to gravity to the left in the front view. Forced toward Therefore, in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position, it is conceivable to fix the drive device 750.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed to be able to swing up and down, and when the lever member 714 swings downward, it is engaged with the locking part 725 of the support member 720, and Slide movement in the direction is restricted.

This makes it possible to mechanically maintain the tilting unit 600 in the retracted position, so when the tilting unit 600 is placed in the retracted position, the tilting unit 600 can be maintained with the driving device 750 stopped. Can be maintained in the retreat position. Therefore, the durability of the drive device 750 can be improved.

Note that by swinging the lever member 714 upward and operating the drive device 750 from the state in which the tilting unit 600 is placed in the retracted position, the support member 720 can be moved, and the tilting unit 600 can be moved in the left-right direction. It can be moved by sliding.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the tilting operation unit 600 is placed in the inverted state at the retracted position, the shaft support 741a of the connecting member 740 is placed vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600.

Here, since the direction of the sliding movement of the tilting unit 600 is along the front rail portion 715, in FIG. always has a vertical component.

Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting unit 600 and the shaft support 741a of the connecting member 740 are misaligned in the vertical direction, there is a risk that a load will be applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting unit 600. This also applies when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid in the opposite direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the shaft support 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied from the connecting member 740 to the tilting unit 600 and the center of gravity G. formed on the same line. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a load from being applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting operation unit 600, and the posture of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 on the sliding motion of the sliding motion unit 700 will be described. FIG. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 54(b).

As shown in FIG. 57, in a state where the presentation member 620 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the center of gravity G of the presentation member 620 is located to the left of the connecting member 740 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the leftward acceleration applied to the connecting member 740 in the front view is increased.

In this case, the driving force required to slide the tilting unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, so the drive motor 751 of the drive device 750 can be downsized.

Next, the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body part 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface, but in the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment, the main body part of the transmission member 2640 2641 includes an abutment portion 2641a that abuts the tip of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

58(a), 58(b), and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 58(a), FIG. 58(b), and FIG. 59, the external shapes of the base member 610 and the presentation member 620 are illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 58(a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 58(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 58(a). 59 shows a state in which the transmission member 2640 is swung a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip of the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650. In FIG. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise in front view from the state in FIG. 58(b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58(a)), the main body 2641 is pressed against the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650, causing the main body 2641 to The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force for swinging in the direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 is swung and the biasing arm 652 is deformed, the coil portion 651 is deformed in diameter by the connecting arm 653 connected to the biasing arm 652 on the side receiving the deformation. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the biasing force for swinging the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58, due to the difference in the swing angle between the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 2640, the contact position between the main body 2641 of the transmission member 2640 and the biasing arm 652 ( The position of the tip of the biasing arm 652 is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 2640. That is, the more the transmission member 2640 is swung, the more the tip of the biasing arm 652 is moved toward the tip of the main body 2641 (toward the side closer to the sliding hole 643).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front while the lower surface of the abutment portion 2641a is in contact with the tip of the biasing arm portion 642, , the biasing arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641 by the abutting portion 2641a.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung while the movement of the attachment transfer arm 642 is restricted by the abutment portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, as the biasing arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641, the base side (bent portion 653a side) of the biasing arm portion 642 is moved downward. As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction in which the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced (in the direction in which the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is increased).

That is, compared to the case without the abutting portion 2641a, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 can be increased when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 59. As a result, the degree of change in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (the rate of increase in the biasing force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) can be increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 compared to the state shown in FIG. 58. Can be done. Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased, while when the swing angle is large (see FIG. 59), It is possible to increase the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 non-linearly (beyond elastic change) and obtain a biasing force sufficient to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the contact surface of the main body 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width, but the tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment 3641 is provided with an inclined side surface 3641a on the side surface that comes into contact with the tip end of the torsion spring 650, which is inclined in such a manner that the width becomes wider as it approaches the tip side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

60(a) and 60(b) are front views of a transmission member 3640 and a torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the presentation member 620 are illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 60(a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 60(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 60(a). A state in which the transmission member 3640 is swung a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)), the main body 3641 is pressed against the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650, causing the main body 3641 to The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force for swinging in the direction of returning to the inverted state.

When the transmission member 3640 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 60(a) to the state shown in FIG. The contact position between the main body 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the biasing arm 652 (the position of the tip of the biasing arm 652) is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 3640. That is, the larger the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)), the more the tip of the biasing arm 652 moves toward the tip of the main body 3641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643). ).

Therefore, the tip of the biasing arm 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641a of the main body 3641. That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 undergoes deformation due to the width of the transmission member 3640 being expanded by the inclined side surface 3641a in addition to the deformation caused by the oscillation angle of the transmission member 3640. . In this case, since the width of the transmission member 3640 is further expanded toward the distal end of the transmission member 3640, the larger the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)), the more the inclined side surface 3641a As a result, the width of the transmission member 3640 is expanded, and the deformation of the torsion spring 650 becomes large. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 increases, the rate of increase in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (change in the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 3640) can be increased.

Next, the tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described, but in the tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, the transmission member 4640 is A movable abutment member 4647 having a width shorter than the portion 644 is provided. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 61(a) is a rear perspective view of a transmission member 4640 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61(b) is a rear perspective view of a movable abutment member 4647. Note that in FIG. 61(a), illustration of the movable abutting member 4647 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the front arcuate plate part 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645a arranged symmetrically at intervals shorter than the arrangement interval of the contact parts 644 and drilled in the front-rear direction. Be prepared. The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of rear protrusions 4647b of the movable abutment member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), the movable contact member 4647 includes a main body 4647a formed in a long plate shape, and a pair of rear projections protruding from both ends of the main body 4647a toward the rear side. 4647b, and a front protrusion 4647c projecting from the approximate center of the main body 4647 toward the front in a hemispherical tip.

Note that one end of a coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front protrusion 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (see FIGS. 62(c) and 62(c)). (See FIG. 62(d)). Further, for easy understanding, illustration of the coil spring 4648 is omitted in FIGS. 61(a), 61(b), 62(a), and 62(b).

The rear protrusion 4647b is a part that is inserted into the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640 from the front side, and when it is inserted, it has a sufficient length from the front arc plate part 4645 (it comes into contact with the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650). possible length) is protruded. Note that the rear protrusion 4647b is formed to be inclined at an angle such that it makes plane (line) contact with the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 (see FIG. 64(b)). As a result, the load applied to the biasing arm 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) compared to the case where the biasing arm 652 and the rear protrusion 4647b abut at a point, and the biasing arm 652 can improve the durability of

The front protrusion 4647c is a portion of the production member 4620 that comes into contact with the main body member 4621 (see FIG. 63), and due to its relationship with the escape opening 4621a formed in the main body member 4621, the movable abutment member 4647 The movable abutment member 4647 may be moved away from the front arcuate plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62(c)) or may be brought close to the front arcuate plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62(d)). Note that since the tip of the front protrusion 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, the front protrusion 4647c can easily ride onto the surface of the main body member 4621 from the relief opening 4621a.

62(a) and 62(b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62(c) and 62(d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. Note that in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(c), the movable abutting member 4647 is separated from the front arc plate portion 4645, and in FIGS. 62(b) and 62(d), the movable abutting member 4647 is shown in a state where it is close to the front arc plate portion 4645.

FIG. 63 is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the main body member 4621 of the production member 4620. Note that the transmission member 4640 forming an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is in the center state 4640C, and the state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in front view is the counterclockwise swinging state 4640L. A clockwise swinging state 4640R in which the clockwise swinging state is shown as a clockwise swinging state when viewed from the front is shown by an imaginary line. In addition, in the center state 4640C, counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and clockwise swing state 4640R, illustrations of the contact portion 644, front arc plate portion 4645, and back arc plate portion 646 are omitted for easy understanding. .

The main body member 4621 includes an escape opening 4621a formed in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the escape opening 4621a is located in a region where the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in front view (center state 4640C and counterclockwise oscillation). dynamic state 4640L).

When the front protrusion 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps the escape opening 4621a in front view, the front protrusion 4647c is inserted into the escape opening 4621a, and the movable abutment member 4647 is moved to the transmission member 4640 by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648. (See FIG. 62(c)). On the other hand, when the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap the escape opening 4621a (overlaps with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c is brought into contact with the back side of the main body member 4621 of the production member 4620, and the movable contact member 4647 is brought close to the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62(d)).

That is, the rear protrusion 4647b of the movable abutment member 4647 extends to a position where it can come into contact with the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise in front view from an inverted state. It will be done. Therefore, the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated more when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise in the front view from the inverted state than when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in the front view. The rate of increase in the biasing force (the degree of increase in the biasing force relative to the swing angle) can be increased.

64(a) and 64(b) are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. In addition, in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), the external shapes of the base member 610 and the presentation member 4620 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and the main body portion 4647a of the movable abutting member 4647 is illustrated for ease of understanding. Illustration is omitted. Further, FIG. 64(a) shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 64(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 64(a). A state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung a predetermined amount clockwise in the front view, and the biasing arm 652 on the left side in the front view is in contact with the rear protrusion 4647b is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), while the swing angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, it becomes possible to contact the biasing arm 652 from the side opposite to the main body part 641 of the transmission member 4640 (the contact part 644 side). By doing so, it is possible to increase the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front.

As a result, while increasing the starting speed when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front, it is possible to improve the urging force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the production member 4620 from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210.

That is, when the presentation member 4620 is placed in an inverted state while the tilting operation unit 4600 is placed in the retracted position, the inner surface of the back case 210 is brought close to the presentation member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, if the presentation member 4620 is vigorously swung from the state where it is swung counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 57) toward the inverted state, the presentation member 4620 cannot be decelerated completely, and the rear case 210 There is a risk that the effect member 4620 will collide with the inner surface of the.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rear protrusion 4647b is protruded at the timing when the presentation member 4620 is swung clockwise in front view from the inverted state (see FIG. 62(d)), and the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is can be increased. As a result, the performance member 4620 can be moved sufficiently when the performance member 4620 is tilted clockwise from the inverted state while maintaining a high operating speed when the performance member 4620 is tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the inverted state. can be slowed down.

In addition, the rear projection 4647b is pushed back at the contact point between the rear projection 4647b and the biasing arm 652, which are arranged on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 4640 (counterclockwise in front view in FIG. 64(b) ) is generated. This allows the transmission member 4640 to be pushed back with a larger biasing force compared to the case where the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the biasing arm 652 disposed on the side closer to the transmission member 4640 (the right side in FIG. 64(b)). Can be pushed back. On the other hand, it is also possible to improve the urging force generated by the urging arm portion 652 disposed on the side closer to the transmission member 4640.

That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the contact portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652 disposed on the side opposite to the side approached by the transmission member 4640 come into contact with each other to the lower receiving plate portion 614a The distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is shorter than that of the lower receiving plate portion 614a. In this case, it is easy to use the lower support plate part 614 as a fulcrum and move the bent part 653a with the force from the contact part 644, but the reverse is difficult (there is a difference in the distance from the fulcrum to the point of action). ).

Therefore, the biasing force generated by the deformation of the biasing arm 652 on the left side when viewed from the front due to the contact between the contact portion 644 and the biasing arm 652 is generated by the deformation of the torsion spring 650 as a whole. That is, when the biasing arm 652 on the left side in front view and the rear protrusion 4647b come into contact with each other, the bending part 653a on the left side in front view moves toward the left side in front view (the inner diameter of the coil part 651 The deformation caused by the movement in the narrowing direction) causes deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the biasing arm portion 652 on the right side in front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 undergoes deformation that reduces the inner diameter, a biasing force is generated in the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 toward the side that increases the inner diameter of the coil portion 651, and to the right in front view (transmission member The biasing arm 652 (on the swing direction side of 4640) can improve the biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640.

Next, a composite operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68.

In the first embodiment, when the rotating arm member 550 is placed in the extended position, the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. However, in the rotating arm member 5550 in the fifth embodiment, the non-transmission wall portion 5553c includes a recessed portion 5556 that is recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

65 to 68 are front views of a composite operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment. Note that FIG. 65 shows a state in which the rotating arm member 5550 is placed in the extended position and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is placed near the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c. Now, from the state shown in FIG. 65, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the first recessed part 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall part 5553c. However, in FIG. 67, the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state in FIG. 66 to the position where the sliding protrusion 574 is removed from the recess 5556 is shown in FIG. The state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the recessed portion 5556 on two sides from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is shown in each figure. Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c of the composite operation unit 5550 includes a recessed portion 5556 recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570. As shown in FIGS.

The recessed portion 5556 includes a first wall portion 5556a having an arc shape (approximately 1/4 of a circle) formed on the left side when viewed from the front, and a first wall portion 5556a having an arc shape (approximately 1/4 of a circle) formed on the right side when viewed from the front. The second wall portion 5556b has a shape that allows the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 to slide. That is, the depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is less than or equal to the radius of the sliding protrusion 574, and the connecting portion between the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is smooth. Formed from a curved surface.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, a gap is created between the sliding protrusion 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, Rotating arm member 5550 is swung by the biasing force generated by torsion spring 517a until it comes into contact with sliding protrusion 574. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transferring wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The movable arm member 5550 is swung.

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. The movable arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. It is pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the installation portion 5556, and the rotating arm member 5550 is again swung (pressed down) to the extended position. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the second wall portion 5556b is pushed and moved by the sliding protrusion 574, so that the rotating arm member 5550 is swung. The driving force of the second drive device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570.

Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the second wall 5556b, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating Crank member 570 forms a transmission state.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, a gap is created between the sliding protrusion 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, Rotating arm member 5550 is swung by the biasing force generated by torsion spring 517a until it comes into contact with sliding protrusion 574. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the second recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transferring wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The movable arm member 5550 is swung.

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. The movable arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed facing the first wall 5556a when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the rotating crank member 570 is When a non-transmission state is formed between the movable crank member 570 and the rotary arm member 5550 and the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed facing the second wall portion 5556b, the rotary crank member 570 and the rotary arm member A transmission state is formed with 5550.

Note that if the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in front view, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 are disposed opposite to the first wall 5556a. A transmission state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed facing the second wall 5556b. Ru.

As illustrated in FIGS. 65 to 68, in this embodiment, the rotating arm member 5550 can be moved between the retracted position (see FIG. 22) and the extended position without switching the direction of swing of the rotating crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion in which the rotating arm member 5550 swings between positions, the swing arm member 5550 is moved in a manner in which the width is small near the extended position (a manner in which the lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between positions U1 and U2). A rocking motion can be formed.

Thereby, it is possible to cause the rotating arm member 5550 to perform a swinging motion that is difficult to create by switching the drive direction of the drive device 560. That is, causing the rotating arm member 5550 to perform a small swinging motion near the extended position can also be achieved by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the swinging motion depends on the switching speed of the drive direction of the drive device 560. Further, even if the drive direction of the drive device 560 is switched while the swinging speed of the pivot arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the drive device 560 and the pivot arm member 5550 is large, making it impossible to switch the drive direction instantly. , there was a risk that the time required to switch the driving direction would become longer.

On the other hand, in the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 5550 near the extended position in this embodiment, there is no need to switch the rotational direction of the rotating crank member 570, so the time required for switching the driving direction is not required. can do.

Further, the operating speed of the operation in which the rotating arm member 5550 is swung clockwise in the front view (upward oscillating movement) depends on the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a, so that the rotating arm member 5550 is rotated in the opposite direction in the front view. The speed of the clockwise rocking motion (downward rocking motion) depends on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, by increasing the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570, the swinging speed of the rotating arm member 5550 near the extended position can be increased.

Thereby, it is possible to both increase the speed of the swinging operation near the extended position of the rotating arm member 5550 and shorten the switching time of the swinging direction.

Next, a composite operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating arm member 550 of the composite operation unit 500 is integrally molded, but the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting two members. . By relatively swinging the two members, the attitude of the arcuate hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

69(a) and 69(c) are partial front views of the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 69(b) shows the rotating arm member 6550 in the direction of arrow LXIXb in FIG. 69(a). FIG. 7 is a partial top view of arm member 6550. Note that FIG. 69(a) shows a state where the first posture is formed in which the tip of the tip swinging member 6556 is directed upward, and FIG. 69(b) shows a state in which the tip of the tip swinging member 6556 is directed downward. A state in which a second oriented posture is formed is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to a main body portion 6551 that is pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end of the main body portion 6551. It mainly includes a tip swinging member 6556 and a switching device 6590 that is fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the main body section 6551 and switches the attitude of the tip swinging member 6556. Note that an arcuate hole 6554 is formed in the tip swinging member 6556.

The main body portion 6551 includes a shaft support hole 6551a that is bored in the front-rear direction at the other end and serves as the center of swing of the distal end swing member 6556.

The tip swinging member 6556 is formed such that the end connected to the main body 6551 sandwiches the main body 6551 at the front and back, and has a shaft support hole 6556a bored as the center of swing of the tip swinging member 6556. , a shaft support rod 6556b which is a bar inserted through the shaft support hole 6556a and the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip swinging member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arcuate hole 6554. The switching device 6590 mainly includes a sliding shaft 6556c that projects in the front-rear direction from the end of the switching device 6590 and is connected to a guide slot 6591d of the switching device 6590.

The arcuate hole 6554 includes a return portion 6554a that projects from the upper inner surface. The return portion 6554a is a portion that slides on the protrusion portion 541b of the expansion/contraction production member 6540, and when it is slid from the tip side of the circular arc hole 6554, resistance is suppressed, but when it is slid in the opposite direction. It is a protrusion with a left-right asymmetrical shape that increases sliding resistance when moved.

70(a) and 70(b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. Note that FIG. 70(a) shows a push-up state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70(b) shows a push-down state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down against the switch member 6592. is illustrated. Further, the pushed-up state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69(c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69(a).

The C-shaped member 6591 has an elongated plate-shaped main body part 6591a in which a hole with an inner diameter through which the movable columnar part 6592a can be inserted is bored in the center, and an inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the hole bored in the main body part 6591a. A cylindrical guide portion 6591b that protrudes into a cylindrical shape and has a groove formed on its inner circumferential surface, and a cylindrical guide portion 6591b extending downward from both longitudinal ends of the main body portion 6591a and facing each other in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 6551. It mainly includes a pair of arm parts 6591c, and a guide elongated hole 6591d, which is a long hole bored at the distal end side of the arm part 6591c and through which the sliding shaft 6556c of the distal end swinging member 6556 is guided.

The grooves formed on the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591b are grooves for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the movable cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592. Due to this groove processing, the C-shaped member 6591 is switched between a pushed-up state and a pushed-down state each time it is pushed in the direction in which it is pressed against the switch member 6592. Note that other members such as spring members that form the biasing force necessary to form the knocking mechanism are not shown in the drawings, and in this embodiment, the cylindrical guide portion 6591b is connected to the push-in portion 6541a of the telescopic effect device 6540 (Fig. 71).

The switch member 6592 includes a movable cylindrical portion 6592a that is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 6591a and has a protrusion protruding from the outer circumferential surface that is movable in a groove on the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591a, and a movable cylindrical portion 6592a that is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 6591a. It mainly includes a fixed plate part 6592b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the main body part 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550.

Here, in the knock mechanism, the cylindrical member and the cylindrical member guided on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical member rotate relative to each other, and their relative positions in the axial direction are switched. That is, when the cylindrical member and the cylindrical member do not rotate relative to each other, it becomes difficult to switch their relative positions in the axial direction.

On the other hand, the movable cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is rotatably connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved in a direction approaching the switch member 6592 (when pushed downward in FIG. 70(a)), the movable cylindrical portion 6592a can rotate relative to the cylindrical guide portion 6591b. and the knock mechanism functions.

Therefore, the fixed plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591 can be switched between the push-up state and the push-down state without relative rotation. Therefore, the state of the switching device 6590 can be switched between the push-up state and the push-down state while maintaining the state in which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556 is inserted into the guide elongated hole 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591. can.

71(a) and 71(b) are front views of the composite operation unit 6500. FIG. 71(a) shows a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is placed in the extended position and the switching device 6590 is pushed up, and in FIG. K4, the rotating arm member 6550 is placed in the extended position and the switching Device 6590 is shown in a depressed position. In addition, in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is placed in a position where it is swung to the left end of the swiveling range.

As shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), by switching the state of the switching device 6590 in a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is placed in the extended position, the front view clock of the telescopic effect device 540 is The maximum swing angle can be changed.

That is, when the switching device 6590 forms a push-up state (see FIG. 71(a)), the projection 541b of the telescopic effect member 6540 is brought into contact with the upper inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554, and the telescopic effect device 6540 is pushed up. Swing angle is limited.

In this position, the inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as a stopper, and even when the swinging speed of the telescopic effect device 6540 is high, the telescopic effect device 6540 can be operated in the arrangement shown in FIG. 71(a). It is possible to make a sudden stop (the movement locus RI of the protrusion 541b comes into contact with the return portion 6554a).

On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms a depressed state (see FIG. 71(b)), the projection 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (the projection 541b of the projection 541b (The movement trajectory RI does not come into contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is moved along the arcuate hole 6554, and the protrusion 541b is released from the tip 554a of the arcuate hole 6554 to the outside.

Therefore, the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in front view until the rotary plate 520 comes into contact with the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71(b)). In this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and even when the swing speed of the telescopic effect device 6540 is high, the telescopic effect device 540 can be stopped suddenly.

As a result, it is possible to create a plurality of swing angles (two types in this embodiment) when the telescopic effect device 6540 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front, and the telescopic effect device 6540 is suddenly stopped. variations can be increased. The state of the switching device 6590 can be switched by swinging the telescoping member 6540 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the cylindrical guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 moves from the upper right corner of the main body member 6541a to the right when viewed from the front. This is caused by being pushed forward by the pushing portion 6541a extending in the direction. Therefore, the second drive device 560 that causes the expansion/contraction effect member 6540 to swing is also used as the drive device that swings the tip swing member 6556, so the number of drive devices to be provided can be reduced.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the swinging range of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swinging member 6556. In this case, since the swing angle is small, it is difficult for the player to notice the change.

Here, when the rotating arm member 6550 is in a state where the player can see it (see FIG. 71), it is assumed that the swing angle of the telescopic effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the rotating arm member 6550. Expectations for the operation of the expansion/contraction performance device 6540 fade, and the degree of attention to the expansion/contraction performance device 6540 is reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the angle at which the tip swinging member 6556 swings in order to change the swinging angle of the telescopic effect device 6540 is small, making it difficult for the player to notice the change. can. Thereby, expectations for the operation of the elastic effect device 6540 can be increased, and the degree of attention of the elastic effect device 6540 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a tilting operation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, an elongated sliding hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640, and the presentation member 620 is supported in the sliding hole 643 so as to be guided. In the tilting operation unit 7600 in this embodiment, a pivot hole 7643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 7600, and the production member 620 is pivoted in the pivot hole 7643. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

72(a) and 72(b) are front views of a tilting operation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. 72(a) shows an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7643 of the transmission member 7640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 72(b) shows the inverted state. A state in which the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the production member 620 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and the transmission member 7640 and base member 7610 on the back side thereof are visible. At the same time, illustration of the torsion spring 650 and the shaft support protrusion 612 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), the base member 7610 includes a sliding hole 7613 formed vertically below the second shaft support hole 614 of the main body portion 611 in the front-rear direction. The sliding hole 7613 is an elongated hole through which the swing shaft portion 626 of the presentation member 620 is inserted, and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole is formed along the up-down direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is slidably supported in the sliding hole 7613.

The transmission member 7640 has a shaft support hole 7643 formed at an end opposite to the end where the cylindrical portion 642 of the main body portion 641 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a part that pivotally supports the sliding shaft portion 621a of the presentation member 620, and is bored with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding shaft portion 621a.

The swinging motion of the production member 620 is caused by the transmission member 7640 swinging around the second shaft support hole 614 due to the rotation of the drive motor 631 of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 51).

In this embodiment, the sliding shaft portion 621a is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 7643, so when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620 moves along the swinging locus of the transmission member 7640. (the sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted through the sliding hole 7613, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610.

Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the production member 620 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 72(b), when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72<transmission swing angle). Dynamic angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is oscillated in the minimum resolution unit of the drive motor 631, the oscillation angle of the production member 620 can be made smaller than the oscillation angle of the transmission member 7640. Thereby, the accuracy of adjusting the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the swing angle of the presentation member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71 from the inverted state can be made smaller compared to the case of the first embodiment. explain.

A connecting line J1 illustrated in FIG. 72(b) is a line drawn from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626. The virtual connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and when the swing shaft part 626 is placed above the sliding hole 7613 from a line drawn in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 641 through the cylindrical part 642. This is a line drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 72(a)). Note that the virtual angle φ73, which is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2, is the same as that of the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the sliding hole 7613. This corresponds to the swing angle of the production member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), the presentation swing angle φ72 is made smaller than the virtual angle φ73, and according to the tilting operation unit 7600 of the seventh embodiment, the presentation when the transmission member 7640 is swung by a predetermined angle is made smaller than the virtual angle φ73. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than in the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the amount of oscillation of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be adjusted. accuracy can be improved.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 80. In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the electric accessory 640a and the second prize opening 640b are arranged directly below the through gate 67 and the balls flow smoothly, but the flow path forming unit 8800 in the eighth embodiment A direction changing part 8826 is provided between the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a to intentionally create a direction in which the ball can easily flow down. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. Further, in the description of this embodiment, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of a flow path forming unit 8800 in the eighth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 73, the cover plate member 8820 is shown on the left side with its back surface facing the front side, and the base plate member 8810 is shown on the right side with its front side facing the front side.

As shown in FIG. 73, the flow path forming unit 8800 is a unit disposed in the lower right portion of the gaming area (an area where the vertical wall portion 73b and the inclined wall portion 73c intersect, see FIG. 2), and is A plate-shaped base plate member 8810 fastened and fixed to the board 13 (see FIG. 2), and a plate member disposed at a predetermined distance on the front side of the base plate member 8810 and raised on the back side. A covering plate member 8820 is fastened and fixed to the base plate member 8810 at a portion.

The base plate member 8810 includes a plate-shaped main body member 8811 in which a through gate 67 is arranged at the upper end and an electric accessory 640a and a second prize opening 640b are arranged in this order below the plate-shaped main body member 8811, and a through gate 67 and an electric A recessed portion 8812 is provided between the accessories 640a and recessed from the front side wall surface of the main body member 8811 toward the back side.

The cover plate member 8820 includes a plate-shaped main body member 8821 that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the front side of the main body member 8811 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), and is formed to be raised from the main body member 8821 to the back side. a plurality of raised parts 8822, 8823, 8824, 8825; and a direction changing part 8826 which is composed of a plurality of protrusions disposed on the front side of the recessed part 8812 of the base plate member 8810 in the assembled state (see FIG. 3). , is provided.

The plurality of raised parts are composed of a first raised part 8822, a second raised part 8823, a third raised part 8824, and a fourth raised part 8825, each of which has the same length (more than the diameter of the game ball). By raising the ball by the length), a channel through which the ball can flow is formed in the portion surrounded by the raised portions 8822, 8823, 8824, 8825 and the main body members 8811, 8821 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The first raised portion 8822 includes a housing portion 8822a that accommodates the through gate 67, and a downward slope from the right side surface (left side surface in FIG. 73) of the housing portion 8822a in a front view to the right side (left side in FIG. 73). and a curved wall portion 8822c that curves and extends downward from the left side in front view (right side in FIG. 73) at the lower end portion of the housing portion 8822a.

With such a configuration, the game balls flowing down the upstream side of the first raised portion 8822 can be sorted into a flowing path depending on whether they pass through the through gate 67 or roll on the inclined surface portion 8822b (see FIG. 76).

The second raised part 8823 is a ball rolling on the inclined surface part 8822b at a position moved a predetermined distance to the right in front view (left in FIG. 73) from the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a. is arranged at a position where it falls, and the upper surface is formed to be inclined downward toward the left side in front view (right side in FIG. 73), and crosses the locking part 8825c to the left side in front view (right side in rear view). It will be extended to the location.

The third raised portion 8824 is spaced a predetermined distance vertically below the left side surface (right side surface in FIG. 73) of the housing portion 8822a when viewed from the front, and is located at a position where the gap with at least the lower end of the curved wall portion 8822c is equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. Placed.

The fourth raised portion 8825 is configured such that its upper surface slopes downward toward the left in front view (right side in FIG. 73), and is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with the lower side of the electric accessory 640a when it extends. a rolling wall surface 8825b that is offset upward from the contact wall surface 8825a with a slight gap from the right end of the electric accessory 640a in front view (the right end in FIG. 73); A locking portion 8825c extends upward from the right end (left end in FIG. 73) of the wall surface 8825b in front view, and a pair of channel wall surfaces 8825d extends downward from the intermediate portion of the abutting wall surface 8825a. Equipped with.

The locking portion 8825c is a portion for preventing the ball rolling on the rolling wall surface 8825b from flowing into the discharge port 8825c1 that guides the ball to the second out port 315 (see FIG. 2). The extension length is approximately 1/3 of the diameter of the pipe.

As described above in the first embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is normally in the closed state (protruding forward, see FIG. 73), but when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it becomes the open state. (retracted to the rear). Therefore, compared to a downstream route that does not pass through the through gate 67 (for example, a downstream route that rolls on the inclined surface portion 8822b), the downstream route that passes through the through gate 67 is more advantageous for the player (highly advantageous). ).

Conventionally, when the electric accessory 640a and the second prize opening 640b are arranged in the area below the through gate 67, the path of the ball is changed by planting a nail below the through gate 67, and some The balls were adjusted to flow down to the electric accessory 640a and the second winning opening 640b, and the other balls were adjusted to flow down avoiding the electric accessory 640a and the second winning opening 640b. Therefore, there was a problem that the space for arranging the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a, and the second prize opening 640b became large.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a, and the second prize opening 640b are configured as a unit (integrated with the base plate member 8810), thereby reducing the overall configuration. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing other game areas of the game board 13 can be improved.

Moreover, by being configured as one unit, it is possible to suppress changes in the relative positional relationship between the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a, and the direction changing part 8826. Thereby, the relative positional relationship between the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a, and the direction changing part 8826 changes, so that it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down a path different from the designed intention.

Here, the smaller the size (the shorter the distance between the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a), the easier it is for the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to flow down to the electric accessory 640a, and the more the nail is planted. As a result, a new problem has arisen in that the profits given to players may become too large. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a direction changing part 8826 is provided on the covering plate member 8820, and the direction of the ball colliding with the direction changing part 8826 is branched into a plurality of types, so that the direction of the ball colliding with the direction changing part 8826 is divided into multiple types. The structure is such that the proportion of balls flowing down towards the target is reduced in advance.

The configuration of the direction changing section 8826 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74(a) to 74(d). 74(a) is a front view of the direction changing portion 8826, FIG. 74(b) is a top view of the direction changing portion 8826 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 74(c) is a front view of the direction changing portion 8826. is a side view of the direction changing portion 8826 when viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVc in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 74(d) is a side view of the direction changing portion 8826 when viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVd in FIG. 74(a). . Note that in FIG. 74(a), illustration of the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 8820 is omitted, and in FIGS. 74(b) to 74(d), the main body member 8821 is partially viewed in cross section. Moreover, in FIGS. 74(a) to 74(d), the outer shape of the recessed portion 8812 of the base plate member 8810 is illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 74(a) to 74(d), the direction changing portion 8826 is raised from the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 8820 to the rear side (back side in FIG. 74(a)) and extends in the vertical direction. A plurality of (four in this embodiment) protrusions 8826a, 8826b, 8826c, and 8826d are provided.

The convex part is a trapezoidal part whose upper base is shorter than the lower base when viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 74(c) or FIG. 74(d)), and when viewed from the front (see FIG. 74(a)). ), the upper sides are arranged in such a manner that they are inclined downward toward the right side when viewed from the front, and the lower sides are configured in a shape that follows the slope of the fourth raised portion 8825 (see FIG. 73). It includes a protruding portion 8826a, a second protruding portion 8826b, a third protruding portion 8826c, and a fourth protruding portion 8826d.

The first protruding portion 8826a has a shorter protruding height (about half) than the adjacent second protruding portion 8826b, and the inclined side surface 8826a1 formed as the left side surface when viewed from the front is about 45 It is formed so that it is inclined at an angle of 100 degrees (see FIG. 74(b)) and is slightly curved to the left in front view as it goes downward. Therefore, it is possible to change the horizontal velocity of the ball flowing down from the left side of the first convex portion 8826a when viewed from the front in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 74(a)) (reduce the horizontal velocity). At the same time, it is possible to easily direct the downward flow of the ball in the direction in which the first convex portion 8826a curves.

The second protruding portion 8826b and the third protruding portion 8826c have a protruding height that is approximately twice that of the first protruding portion 8826a, and are inclined faces with their surfaces facing toward the other side. It is provided with inclined side surfaces 8826b1 and 8826c1, and is arranged in such a manner that the distance between them increases as it goes downward. Therefore, by causing the balls that have flowed down to the upper half of the second convex portion 8826b and the third convex portion 8826c to collide with the facing inclined side surfaces 8826b1 and 8826c1, the second convex portion 8826b and the third convex portion 8826c are It is possible to easily maintain the ball between the balls, and the ball that has flown down to the lower half of the second protruding portion 8826b and the third protruding portion 8826c comes into contact with the second protruding portion 8826b and the third protruding portion 8826c. It can be suppressed from being discharged in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 74(a)) while in contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 74(b), the ball flowing down between the second protruding part 8826b and the third protruding part 8826c is formed on the opposing sides of the second protruding part 8826b and the third protruding part 8826c. By being hooked to the end portion of , movement in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 74(b)) is suppressed. That is, the second protrusion 8826b and the third protrusion 8826c are spaced apart from each other so that the ball can be caught thereon.

The fourth protruding portion 8826d has the same protruding height as the first protruding portion 8826a, and the inclined side surface 8826d1 formed as the right side surface in front view is inclined at an angle of approximately 45 degrees (FIG. 74(b) reference). Therefore, the velocity in the left-right direction of the ball flowing down from the right side of the first convex portion 8826a when viewed from the front can be changed in the front-back direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 74(a)).

With reference to FIG. 75, the recessed portion 8812 of the base plate member 8810 will be described. 75(a) is a front view of the recessed portion 8812 showing only the recessed portion 8812 of the base plate member 8810, and FIG. 75(b) is a front view of the recessed portion 8812 taken along the line LXXVb-LXXVb of FIG. 75(a). 75(c) is a sectional view of the recessed portion 8812 taken along the line LXXVc-LXXVc in FIG. 75(a). Note that in FIGS. 75(b) and 75(c), the main body member 8811 of the base plate member 8810 is partially illustrated, and in FIG. 75(b), the outline of the direction changing portion 8826 is illustrated with imaginary lines. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 75, the outer periphery of the recessed portion 8812 is inclined in such a manner that the cross-sectional area of the recessed section decreases as the outer periphery goes toward the recessed direction (towards the back of the paper in FIG. 75(a)), and the outer periphery has the following shape. It is disposed in such a manner as to surround the direction changing portion 8826 along the outer peripheral shape of the direction changing portion 8826 when viewed from the front. That is, the ball that collides with the outer peripheral portion of the direction changing portion 8826 (see FIG. 73) and bounces back and forth collides with the inside of the recessed portion 8812.

The recessed portion 8812 has a different shape when viewed in cross section along a plane extending in the vertical direction (see FIG. 75(b)) and a shape viewed in cross section along a plane extending in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 75(c)). be done.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), the shape of the recessed portion 8812 when viewed in cross section along a plane extending in the vertical direction is a curved shape in which the upper and lower sides are formed by arcs with different radii of curvature. That is, the upper circular arc portion 8812a disposed opposite to the upper inclined surface of the direction changing portion 8826 has a circular arc shape with a first radius of curvature 8812r, and the lower circular arc portion 8812a extends downward from the lower end of the upper circular arc portion 8812a. The side arc portion 8812b has an arc shape with a second radius of curvature 8812R. Here, the first radius of curvature 8812r is shorter than the second radius of curvature 8812R (8812r<8812R). Further, the first radius of curvature 8812r has a length equivalent to the depth of the deepest part of the recessed portion 8812.

Therefore, the direction in which the ball bounces can be directed in an advantageous direction for each ball collision position in the front-rear direction of the recessed portion 8812. That is, since the upper arc portion 8812a is an arc formed over a center angle of 90 degrees, the velocity of the ball that collided with the recessed portion 8812 near the front side of the recessed portion 8812 (right side in FIG. 75(b)) is reduced downward. The ball that collided with the recessed portion 8812 near the back of the recessed portion 8812 (left side in FIG. 75(b)) can be redirected while maintaining a large velocity in the front and rear direction. .

This prevents the ball that collided with the upper circular arc portion 8812a from bouncing back and collides again with the upper slope portion of the direction change portion 8826, and also prevents the ball from colliding with the direction change portion 8826 again (recessed portion). By bouncing the ball that collides with the upper arc portion 8812a at the lower position of 8812), it is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from stagnating (the flow of the ball can be made smoother). ).

That is, if the flow path is a single path such as a warp flow path, it is possible to easily make the balls flow down without interfering with each other even when the balls flow down in a row while decelerating the balls. On the other hand, if the balls are decelerated in an area where they can freely flow down, instead of in a straight path, as in this embodiment, the balls tend to interfere with each other, and the smooth flow of the balls is likely to be hindered. Therefore, the manner in which the balls flow changes depending on whether the balls arrive at the direction changing part 8826 all at once or one ball at a time, and there is a risk that the player will have to adjust the firing interval of the balls. A problem arises in that the profits obtained by the player vary depending on the skill of the player.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, by displacing the ball in the thickness direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), the descending speed (downward velocity component) of the ball can be reduced, and the ball Since the direction in which the ball bounces can be made to move away from the ball that comes after, it is possible to prevent the balls from colliding with each other and worsening the flow of the balls.

In addition, the lower arc portion 8812b is composed of an arc with a radius of curvature larger than the first radius of curvature 8812r, and its normal direction is directed forward regardless of the arrangement, so the ball collided with the lower arc portion 8812b. can be bounced back toward the front. This also prevents the flow of the balls from stagnating (the flow of the balls can be made smoother).

As shown in FIG. 75(c), the shape of the recessed portion 8812 when viewed in cross section along a plane extending in the horizontal direction is a shape along the left-right direction. Therefore, regardless of the colliding position, the balls that collide and bounce are bounced back under the same conditions, so that the flow of the balls flowing in the left-right direction on the front side of the recessed portion 8812 can be made uniform.

In this way, the recessed portion 8812 has a shape when viewed in cross section along a plane extending in the vertical direction (see FIG. 75(b)) and a shape viewed in cross section along a plane extending in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 75(c)). By having different shapes, the influence on the ball when the ball collides with the recessed portion 8812 can be varied depending on the direction in which the ball flows.

Referring to FIG. 76, the flow path of the ball will be described. FIG. 76 is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 8800 in the assembled state. Note that in FIG. 76, illustration of the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 8820 is omitted, and the vertical wall portion 73b is partially illustrated for ease of understanding (see FIG. 2). In addition, the first variable winning device 65 is partially illustrated, and the illustration between the first variable winning device 65 and the fourth raised part 8825 is omitted with an omitted line. The ball flows down to the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 76, the flow path through which the ball flows down via the direction change section 8826 is mainly divided into four. That is, along the first downstream path O81, which is a path extending vertically through the center position of the second protruding part 8826b and the third protruding part 8826c, and the left side surface of the second protruding part 8826b when viewed from the front. The second flow path B81 is a path extending diagonally downward, and the third flow path B82 is a path extending diagonally downward along the right side surface of the third convex portion 8826c when viewed from the front. It is divided into a fourth downstream path B83, which is a path running along the upper surface of the changing portion 8826 and heading to the right in front view.

Among these four flow paths, the ball passing through the first flow path O81 and the third flow path B82 passes between the flow path wall surfaces 8825d and enters the second prize opening 640b when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state. there's a possibility that. In addition, since the ball passing through the second downstream path B81 reaches the fourth raised portion 8825 on the left side of the channel wall surface 8825d in front view, it is prevented from winning the second prize opening 640b. Furthermore, there is a risk that the ball passing through the fourth downstream path B83 may jump over the locking portion 8825c and enter the discharge port 8825c1.

The second flow path B81 is a path along the left side surface of the second convex portion 8826b. Here, as shown in FIG. 76, the second convex portion 8826b has a central axis of the opening formed by the pair of channel wall surfaces 8825d, in which the direction of the tangent to the left side surface increases from the upper end to the lower end. It consists of a shape that moves away from.

As a result, when the ball flows down along the second convex portion 8826b, the speed of the ball moves away from the opening formed by the pair of channel wall surfaces 8825d (deviates from the direction) as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Directed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball flowing down along the left side surface of the second convex portion 8826b to win a prize in the second winning opening 640b.

Further, the second convex portion 8826b has a shape that moves away from (deviates from) the central axis of the opening formed by the channel wall surface 8825d as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. As a result, when the ball flows down along the second convex portion 8826b, the ball can be moved in a direction away from the opening formed by the channel wall surface 8825d (deviating direction) from the upper end to the lower end. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball flowing down along the second convex portion 8826b to win a prize in the second winning opening 640b.

The paths X81 and X82 of the ball passing through the through gate 67 and reaching the direction changing section 8826 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 76, the center line O82 of the opening of the through gate 67 is disposed at a position parallel to the first flow path 81 by a predetermined distance D81 to the left when viewed from the front.

Since the second convex portion 8826b is disposed at the center position between the center line O82 and the first downstream path O81, the downstream velocity of the ball passing through the through gate 67 is controlled by the curved wall portion 8822c. After that, a first route X81 passes on the right side of the second protruding part 8826b, a second route X82 passes on the left side of the second protruding part 8826b, and a direction to the right of the first route X81. It branches into a fourth downstream path B83 that passes along the upper side of the changing portion 8826.

Note that the rate of branching can be set by various methods, and for example, by changing the speed of the ball passing through the through gate 67, the rate can be changed. That is, for example, the slower the speed of the ball, the more room there is for the ball to move in the left-right direction by a predetermined distance D81 while the ball is flowing down.

In addition, as described above, the direction change section 8826 has the function of displacing the ball in the thickness direction of the game board 13 when the ball passes, and reducing the velocity component in the vertical direction. With the part 8826, it is possible to create a ball that flows down to the right among the balls that have passed through the through gate 67, and a ball that flows down (descends) toward the second winning opening 640b. The ball flowing down (descending) toward 640b can be decelerated.

As a result, even when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are unitized to narrow the distance as in the present embodiment, the time required for the electric accessory 640a to open due to the action of the ball passing through the through gate 67 can be reduced. During this period, the ball can be held between the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, as a result of narrowing the distance between the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a as in the past, the electric accessory 640a is opened by the action of the ball passing through the through gate 67. Compared to a gaming machine in which the ball that triggered the release passes by the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to increase the profit obtained by the player.

In such a gaming machine, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can pass through the electric accessory 640a and pass through the second prize opening 640b to obtain a chance to win a lottery, so it is possible to win a lottery with high frequency. be able to.

For example, even if a lottery is designed to be completed at high speed, if there is a long gap between the fluctuating performance for the previous lottery and the fluctuating performance for the subsequent lottery, players will get bored (decreased interest). do). On the other hand, in this embodiment, the frequency of the lottery can be increased by allowing the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to directly pass through the second prize opening 640b and receive a lottery, so that an empty period occurs. By completing the lottery at high speed (high frequency), it is possible to shorten the period until a jackpot occurs in a probability variable game, and prevent a decline in player interest. can.

The flow path Y81 of the ball that does not pass through the through gate 67 but rolls on the upper surface of the second raised portion 8823 will be described. The ball flowing down the flow path Y81 reaches the direction changing part 8826 when it bounces up to a height that reaches the direction changing part 8826. In this case, the collision with the direction changing part 8826 reduces the speed in the left and right direction, so that the ball tends to flow down along the right side of the third convex part 8826c (flowing down along the third flow path B82). ). Thereby, it is possible to change the flowing path of the ball that flows down by jumping over the second winning hole 640b to the flowing path that flows into the second winning hole 640b. Therefore, compared to a ball that passes through the through gate 67, a ball that flows down without passing through the through gate 67 is configured to be more likely to win a prize in the second winning opening 640b.

In other words, a ball that has flown down a path that passes through the through gate 67 (a highly advantageous path) has a high probability of subsequently flowing down a path that is less advantageous, and a ball that has flown down while avoiding the through gate 67 is The subsequent advantage is increased (it becomes easier to win in the second winning hole 640b). Thereby, even if fraud is committed by adjusting the nail to make it easier for the ball to pass through the through gate 67, it is possible to prevent the advantage from becoming extremely high, such as causing too many balls to come out.

In addition, by reducing the velocity in the left-right direction of the ball flowing down along the downstream path Y81 by the direction change unit 8826, the ball passing through the through gate 67 and the ball flowing down along the downstream path Y81 are likely to collide. Even if the collision occurs, the amount by which the ball moves in the left-right direction can be reduced. As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is collided with the ball flowing down along the downflow path Y81, so that the ball begins to roll to the left of the channel wall surface 8825d (in the direction away from the second winning opening 640b). ) can be prevented from reaching the fourth raised portion 8825 or the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 will flow into the second winning opening 640b.

Here, when attempting to change the downward direction of the game ball by planting a nail in the position where the direction changing part 8826 is arranged, the space in which the game ball can flow down is narrowed by the nail, so for example, When balls gather from multiple directions below the gate 67, a problem arises in that balls are likely to become clogged. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the entire range of the merging region S81, which is the region including the direction change portion 8826 and where the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and the ball that has deviated from the through gate 67 merge, is covered by the ball. It can be used as a downstream route. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and to allow the balls to flow down smoothly.

That is, in this embodiment, no nails are planted in the merging area S81 to narrow the downstream path of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has flowed into the merging region S81 from bouncing back in the direction from which it came, like when bouncing off a nail. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball that has flowed down on the downstream path Y81 and entered the merging area S81 bounces back and enters the discharge port 8825c1 without colliding with other balls.

Further, unlike a nail, the direction changing portion 8826 cannot be easily adjusted, so the state of the direction changing portion 8826 can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from fraudulently attempting to obtain a profit by fraudulently adjusting the direction in which the ball tends to flow downward.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case will be described in which a plurality of balls are arranged in the vertical direction of the direction changing portion 8826. 77(a) and 77(b) are partial front views of the flow path forming unit 8800. In addition, in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, two balls retained above the electric accessory 640a are illustrated with imaginary lines, and the covered plate Illustration of the main body member 8821 of the member 8820 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77(a), since the distance from the locus L81 of the ball rolling on the electric accessory 640a and the rolling wall surface 8825b to the lower end of the direction changing part 8826 is less than or equal to the diameter of the sphere, the electric accessory When two balls stay above 640a, the upper ball can be arranged between the second protruding part 8826b and the third protruding part 8826c, and the ball can be placed between the second protruding part 8826b and the third protruding part By being caught by the tip of the opposing surface of the protruding portion 8826c, it is possible to suppress the ball from shifting in the left-right direction.

That is, if nothing is formed at the position where the direction changing part 8826 is arranged and it is surrounded by the flat part of the base plate member 8810 and the flat part of the covering plate member 8820, the ball will not move up and down on the electric accessory 640a. If the balls line up in the same direction and collide, the upper ball will fly away randomly, so it is difficult to win the upper ball into the second winning hole 640b. As a result, there are many wasted balls.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the direction in which the upper ball bounces is suppressed to the range between the second protruding portion 8826b and the third protruding portion 8826c, and the upper ball can be kept on the first downstream path O81. Can be done. Therefore, the upper ball can be maintained between the second protruding part 8826b and the third protruding part 8826c until the lower ball passes, and after the electric accessory 640a is released, the upper ball There is a possibility that a prize will be won in the second prize opening 640b. Therefore, for example, a ball that has flown down along the flow path Y81 (a bouncing ball) and a ball that has fallen from the second raised portion 8823 flows down without bouncing much on the rolling wall surface 8825b (with less bounce compared to the flow path Y81). Even when the small balls) collide near the opening formed by the channel wall surface 8825d, it is possible to make it easier for both balls to enter the second winning opening 640b, and it is possible to reduce wasted balls.

In addition, by providing the direction changing part 8826 and the recessed part 8812, the ball has a velocity in the front-back direction, and the falling speed of the ball is slower than free falling, so the electric accessory 640a This makes it easier to buy time until the ball is released, and has the effect of reducing wasted balls.

With reference to FIG. 78, an example of how a ball that reaches the direction changing portion 8826 through the downstream path Y81 (see FIG. 76) bounces back will be described.

78(a) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 8800, and FIG. 78(b) is a partial sectional view of the flow path forming unit 8800 taken along the line LXXVIIIb-LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a). 78(c) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 8800, and FIG. 78(d) is a partial sectional view of the flow path forming unit 8800 taken along the line LXXVIIId-LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c). Note that in FIGS. 78(a) and 78(c), illustration of the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 8820 is omitted, and in FIGS. The state before reaching the ball is illustrated, and in FIGS. 78(c) and 78(d), the state after the ball bounces off the direction changing portion 8826 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b), when the ball reaches the direction changing portion 8826 through the downstream path Y81, the ball arrives from the right side of the direction changing portion 8826 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball collides with the inclined side surface 8826d1 of the fourth convex portion 8826d. Here, since the inclined side surface 8826d1 is configured to be inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 8820, the velocity direction V81 of the ball that collided and rebounded is redirected in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from moving in the left-right direction.

In FIGS. 78(c) and 78(d), as an example of the arrangement of the balls that bounced off the fourth convex portion 8826d, balls arranged at different positions are illustrated with imaginary lines. The right ball is shown as an example of bouncing off the recessed portion 8812 on the right side of the third raised portion 8826c. In this case, when the ball moves along the velocity direction V82, the ball collides with the right side surface of the third convex portion 8826c, and the leftward velocity of the ball is reduced. As a result, the ball is prevented from moving further to the left, and the ball is allowed to flow down along the third downstream path B82.

Furthermore, the ball on the left side is illustrated as an example of bouncing off the recessed portion 8812 on the right side of the second protruding portion 8826b. In this case, when the ball moves along the velocity direction V83, the ball collides with the facing inclined side surface 8826b1 of the second protruding portion 8826b, and the leftward velocity of the ball is reduced, and the second protruding portion 8826b Since the portion 8826b is formed to be inclined downward toward the left in FIG. 78(c), the velocity of the ball after collision changes downward. As a result, the ball is prevented from moving further to the left, and the ball is allowed to flow down along the first downstream path O81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the balls from passing to the left of the direction changing part 8826, and increase the number of balls that win into the second winning opening 640b.

In addition, by changing the velocity of the ball in the left-right direction in the front-back direction, for example, when the ball is flowing down on the first flow path O81, the ball arrives from the right side of the direction change part 8826, and those balls are In the case of a collision, the load in the left-right direction applied to the ball flowing down the first downstream path O81 can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress the ball flowing down the first downstream path O81 from being thrown out in the left-right direction.

Referring to FIG. 79, a description will be given of how a ball flowing down in the vertical direction collides with the recessed portion 8812 and bounces back. FIG. 79 is a partial cross-sectional view of the flow path forming unit 8800 taken along the line LXXIX-LXXIX in FIG. 78(a). Note that in FIG. 79, the upper end and lower end of the recessed portion 8812 are illustrated in an enlarged manner. Further, in FIG. 79, the movement paths along which the ball bounces are illustrated by arrows C81, C82, and C83.

As shown in FIG. 79, the ball that bounced off the upper surface of the direction changing part 8826 collides with the upper arcuate part 8812a of the recessed part 8812 and bounces back. At this time, if the ball moves along arrow C81 and collides with the front side (left side in FIG. 79) of the upper arcuate portion 8812a and rebounds, the velocity direction after bouncing will be closer to the vertical direction than before bouncing. You can turn around. On the other hand, when the ball moves along arrow C82 and collides with the part of the upper arcuate portion 8812a on the back side (left side in FIG. 79) and bounces off, the velocity component in the front-back direction is larger than that of the ball that bounced off along arrow C81. maintained.

This prevents the ball that collided with the upper circular arc portion 8812a from bouncing back and collides again with the upper slope portion of the direction change portion 8826, and also prevents the ball from colliding with the direction change portion 8826 again (recessed portion). By bouncing the ball that collides with the upper arc portion 8812a at the lower position of 8812), it is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from stagnating (the flow of the ball can be made smoother). ).

In addition, the lower arc portion 8812b is composed of an arc with a radius of curvature larger than the first radius of curvature 8812r, and its normal direction is directed forward regardless of the arrangement, so the ball collided with the lower arc portion 8812b. can be bounced back toward the front. This also prevents the flow of the balls from stagnating (the flow of the balls can be made smoother).

With reference to FIG. 80, changes in the speed of the ball reaching the through gate 67 will be described. FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c) are partial front views of the game board 13. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b), the nails P81 and P82 are shown planted vertically from the game board 13, and in FIG. 80(c), the tips of the nails P81 and P82 are The figure shows a bent state in which it moves to the lower right when viewed from the front.

As illustrated in FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b), by the time the sphere reaches the through gate 67, the ball is placed above the flow path forming unit 8800, as exemplified by the flow paths Z81 and Z82. The ball collides with the nails P81, P82, P83, and P84 multiple times, and flows down while changing the direction of the ball, so its speed is reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80(c), when the tips of nails P81 and P82 placed below the ball flow path E81 are bent in such a manner that they move to the lower right in front view, the imaginary line Like the balls shown in the figure, the balls can be brought into contact with the nails P81 and P82 in a rubbing manner, making it easier for the balls to enter the through gate 67 without colliding with the nails P83 and P84. As a result, the ball can reach the through gate 67 while maintaining a high velocity of the ball.

In this case, the rate at which the ball flows down to the right of the nails P81 and P82 decreases, so if the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is allowed to enter the second prize opening 640b (see FIG. 76), it will be illegally released. This is a problem because it becomes possible to increase the number of players, making it impossible to provide equal gameplay.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, by branching the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 along the first path X81 or the second path X82, a predetermined number of the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 It is possible to make it impossible to win a prize in the second prize opening 640b for a proportion of balls. For example, the falling path of the ball can be branched based on a predetermined value of the speed of the ball passing through the through gate 67. In this case, the ball flowing down along the falling path E81 (high speed) is transferred to the second path X82. The ball (low speed) flowing down along the flow paths Z81 and Z82 can be caused to flow down the first path X81 (due to the low speed in the vertical direction, the ball curves to the right in the front view of FIG. 76 by a predetermined distance D81). The ball can flow along the direction of the wall 8822c).

Therefore, even if the nails P81 and P82 are illegally bent and balls are likely to gather in the through gate 67, the balls that reach the through gate 67 in that state will enter the second prize opening 640b (see FIG. 76). It is possible to suppress winnings, and it is possible to prevent adjustments that would result in an unauthorized increase in the number of balls put out.

Further, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to reverse the advantages and disadvantages of the profits given to the player as the gaming state changes. For example, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that is advantageous in a time-saving state but disadvantageous in a special game state. This will be explained in detail below.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) has two gaming states: a time saving state and a special gaming state.

81 and 82 are partial front views of the flow path forming unit 8800. 81 and 82 illustrate the case where the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is in a time saving state, and in FIG. is larger than the ratio Yp of balls flowing down to the right above the inclined surface portion 8822b, and in FIG. A case is illustrated in which Yp is smaller than the rate Yp of flowing down to the right above the inclined surface portion 8822b.

In addition, in FIGS. 81 and 82, the electric accessory 640a is illustrated with an imaginary line to represent the state in which the electric accessory 640a is opened, and the reference numeral of the direction change part 8826 is changed for easy understanding. Parts are omitted. In addition, the first variable winning device 65 is partially illustrated, and the illustration between the first variable winning device 65 and the fourth raised part 8825 is omitted with an omitted line. The ball flows down to the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2). In addition, when a ball flows down from upstream of the nails 81 and 83, it is configured in such a manner that it always passes through either of the following flow paths: passing through the through gate 67 or flowing down to the right above the slope portion 8822b. .

In the time saving state shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in this embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is opened and closed when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, if the configuration of the gaming area is such that the ball can easily pass through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 81), it becomes easier to maintain the open state of the electric accessory 640a, and the ball passes through the second prize opening 640b. It is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball. Therefore, the player can have the advantage of being able to obtain lottery opportunities with high frequency in a time-saving state, and also being able to win a prize ball when the ball enters the second winning hole 640b.

On the other hand, some percentage of the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the discharge port 8825c1 along the fourth downstream path B83. The balls that flow down the flow path Y81 without passing through the through gate 67 flow down along the direction away from the opening of the discharge port 8825c1, so it is difficult to flow into the discharge port 8825c1. That is, the more balls that pass through the through gate 67, the more dead balls will flow into the outlet 8825c1, which is a disadvantage.

On the other hand, if the configuration of the gaming area is such that the ball easily flows down above the inclined surface portion 8822b (see FIG. 82), it becomes difficult to maintain the state in which the electric accessory 640a is opened; Dead balls flowing into the outlet 8825c1 can be reduced.

83 and 84 are partial front views of the flow path forming unit 8800. 83 and 84 illustrate the case where the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is in a special game state, and in FIG. A case is illustrated in which Xp is larger than the rate Yp of flowing down to the right above the slope portion 8822b, and in FIG. 84, the rate of balls flowing down from upstream of nails 81 and 83 passing through gate 67 A case is illustrated in which Xp is smaller than the rate Yp of flowing down to the right above the inclined surface portion 8822b.

Further, in FIGS. 83 and 84, the first variable winning device 65 is shown in an open state, and some of the reference numerals of the direction changing portions 8826 are omitted for easy understanding. In addition, the first variable winning device 65 is partially illustrated, and the illustration between the first variable winning device 65 and the fourth raised part 8825 is omitted with an omitted line. The ball flows down to the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2). In addition, when a ball flows down from upstream of the nails 81 and 83, it is configured in such a manner that it always passes through either of the following flow paths: passing through the through gate 67 or flowing down to the right above the slope portion 8822b. .

In the special game state, in this embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 opens and closes regardless of whether a ball passes through the through gate 67 or not. In this embodiment, the first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged at a position where the ball that has rolled on the fourth raised part 8825 can enter the ball by falling from the left end of the fourth raised part 8825.

Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to reduce the number of balls flowing down from other than the left end of the fourth raised portion 8825. Here, as described above, the direction of the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 is branched by the direction changing part 8826, and some balls flow into the discharge port 8825c1, resulting in dead balls (prize balls). (balls that do not tangle). In the special game state, passing through the through gate 67 does not give any profit to the player, so this dead ball is a ball that is ejected without giving any particular profit to the player.

Therefore, if the configuration of the game area is such that a ball can easily pass through the through gate 67, in the time saving state (see FIG. 81), it is possible to obtain the lottery with high frequency, but on the other hand, the special game In this state (see FIG. 83), the disadvantage that many dead balls occur is noticeable.

On the other hand, if the configuration of the gaming area is such that it is difficult for the ball to pass through the through gate 67 and it is easy for the ball to flow down above the inclined surface portion 8822b, in the time saving state (see FIG. 82), the electric accessory 640a On the other hand, in the special game state (see FIG. 84), there are almost no dead balls, and the player can play the game comfortably. You can get this advantage.

In this way, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the configuration of the game area is such that a ball easily passes through the through gate 67 or is configured such that a ball does not easily pass through the through gate 67, the game state By changing between the time saving state and the special game state, it is possible to reverse whether the game is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to adjust whether or not the configuration of the gaming area is easy to pass through the through gate 67 (for example, if the nails P81 to P84 arranged upstream of the through gate 67 are improperly bent, the ball may be By adjusting the flow pattern), it is possible to suppress drastic changes in the profits given to the player.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the curved wall portion 8822c disposed directly below the through gate 67 slightly overhangs from the end of the opening width of the through gate 67 toward the opening side of the through gate 67. In the flow path forming unit 9800 in the embodiment, the curved wall portion 9822c extends to the central axis of the opening of the through gate 67. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 85 is a partial front view of a flow path forming unit 9800 in the ninth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 85, illustration of the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 9820 is omitted, and the vertical wall portion 73b is partially illustrated. In addition, the first variable winning device 65 is partially illustrated, and the illustration between the first variable winning device 65 and the fourth raised part 8825 is omitted with an omitted line. The ball flows down to the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 85, the first raised portion 9822 includes a curved wall portion 9822c that curves and extends downward to the right from the lower left end in front view of the housing portion 8822a. The curved wall portion 9822c extends in an arc shape with its center on the opening side of the through gate 67, and the extended end portion is arranged on the central axis of the through gate 67.

A path X91 of the ball passing through the through gate 67 and flowing down is illustrated. The route X91 is a route equivalent to the fourth downstream route B83 (see FIG. 76) in the eighth embodiment. As shown in path X91, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is changed in direction from side to side by the curved wall portion 9822c and is ejected to the right, rebounding from the rolling wall portion 8825b and hitting the locking portion 8825c. Jump over it and be led to the outlet 8825c1. Note that the discharge port 8825c1 is an opening that is formed between the locking portion 8825c and the second raised portion 8823 and faces leftward.

As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can be directed to the second out port 315 regardless of its speed, so that it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the game area in a state where it is easy for the ball to illegally pass through the through gate 67. However, it does not directly lead to receiving a large number of lottery tickets with a predetermined number of balls fired, and balls will frequently flow into the outlet 8825c1, so the profit given to the player will be excessively large. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Here, the direction of the discharge port 8825c1 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 85, the discharge port 8825c1 is opened in a direction that allows balls flowing down along the path X91 (having a velocity component in the right direction in FIG. It is opened in a direction that makes it difficult to accept a ball that collides with the upper surface of 8823 and flows down (for example, a ball that flows down on the downstream path Y81 (see FIG. 76) (having a velocity component in the left direction in FIG. 76)). This makes it easier for balls passing through the through gate 67 and flowing down to enter the discharge port 8825c1, and also allows balls passing on the right side of the through gate 67 (for example, balls rolling on the inclined surface portion 8822b) to enter the discharge port 8825c1. It can make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball.

Therefore, while it is possible to prevent a ball that has an increased advantage by passing through the through gate 67 from entering the second prize opening 640b, a ball that has a low advantage by not passing through the through gate 67 can be prevented from entering the second prize opening 640b. It is possible to increase the possibility of winning in the second winning hole 640b or the first variable winning device 65.

Note that the ball bouncing along the path X91 is directed toward the second outlet 315 (see FIG. 2), but it reaches the rolling wall portion 8825b on a different path (for example, the downstream path Y81 (see FIG. 76)) and is The ball that rolls toward the right in front view on the rolling wall portion 8825b due to the collision with the ball enters the discharge port 8825c1 and is prevented from moving toward the second outlet 315 along the vertical wall portion 73b. This can be prevented by the section 8825c. Therefore, the locking portion 8825c can prevent the balls that have reached the rolling wall portion 8825b from entering the discharge port 8825c1 through a less advantageous path (for example, the downward flow path Y81 (see FIG. 76)).

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the direction change part 8826 is fixed, but in the flow path forming unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, the direction change member 10830 is configured to be movable. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 86(a) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 86(b) is a partial cross section of the flow path forming unit 10800 taken along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a). 86(c) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 10800, and FIG. 86(d) is a partial sectional view of the flow path forming unit 10800 taken along the line LXXXVId-LXXXVId in FIG. 86(c). It is. 86(a) and 86(b), the direction changing member 10830 is shown rotated clockwise as shown in FIG. 86(b), and FIG. 86(c) and FIG. A state in which the changing member 10830 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 86(d) is illustrated. Furthermore, illustration of the covering plate 10820 is omitted in FIGS. 86(a) and 86(c).

As shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 86(d), the flow path forming unit 10800 includes a base plate member 10810, a covering plate member 10820 disposed opposite to the base plate member 10810, and a flow direction of the ball. and a direction changing member 10830 that changes the direction.

The base plate member 10810 includes a plate-shaped main body member 10811 and a rectangular shape recessed in a horizontally long rectangular shape on the back side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 86(a)) below the through gate 67 disposed on the main body member 10811. It mainly includes a recessed portion 10812 and pivot supports 10813 which are disposed at both ends of the rectangular recessed portion 10812 and are pawl portions with an arcuate inner periphery that pivotally support the direction change member 10830.

The rectangular recessed portion 10812 is a recessed portion that accommodates the cylindrical portions of the cylindrical portions 10832 and 10833 of the direction change member 10830.

The direction change member 10830 is a member that is pivotally supported by the base plate member 10810, and is formed in a cylindrical shape into which the shaft member 10831 is inserted. It mainly includes a pair of cylindrical parts 10832 and 10833, and a torsion spring 10834 that generates a biasing force that returns the cylindrical parts 10832 and 10833 upward (rotating them clockwise in FIG. 86(b)). Note that a first downstream path O81 is formed at the contact portion of the cylindrical portions 10832 and 10833.

The cylindrical portion 10832 has a first extending claw portion 10832a and a second extending claw portion 10832a that extend from the cylindrical portion 10832 in tangential directions that are different from each other (directions forming an angle of 135 degrees in this embodiment). An extended claw portion 10832b.

Here, the first extending claw portion 10832a and the second extending claw portion 10832b are arranged at the end portion on the side close to the cylindrical portion 10833 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86(a)). Note that the first extending claw portion 10832a is configured in such a shape that the third raising member 8824 is disposed on an extension line extending along the longitudinal direction from the lower end portion in the longitudinal direction.

The cylindrical portion 10833 has third extending claw portions 10833a extending from both ends of the cylindrical portion 10833 in tangential directions and in different directions (directions forming an angle of 135 degrees in this embodiment). , and a fourth extending claw portion 10833b.

Here, in the assembled state (see FIG. 86(a)), the third extending claw part 10833a is disposed at the end close to the cylindrical part 10832, and the third extending claw part 10833a is provided at the end of the second extending claw part 10832b. The fourth extending claw part 10833b is arranged at the opposite end of the cylindrical part 10832, and the fourth extending claw part 10833b is arranged along the same tangent line as the first extending claw part 10832a. It extends along the tangent line.

The third extending claw portion 10833a includes a projecting portion 10833a1 that projects toward the second extending claw portion 10832b and to which the torsion spring 10834 is locked.

The torsion spring 10834 is arranged (wound around) the abutting portions of the cylindrical parts 10832 and 10833, and rotates the cylindrical parts 10832 and 10833 upward (clockwise in FIG. 86(b)) via the protruding part 10833a1. Generates a biasing force to cause

The state shown in FIG. 86(b) corresponds to a state in which the ball is not disposed between the first extending claw portion 10832a and the fourth extending claw portion 10833b. In this case, the distance between the fourth extending claw portion 10833b and the covered plate member 10820 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball that reaches the direction changing member 10830 from the right side of the direction changing member 10830 when viewed from the front is Since it can pass through the fourth extending claw part 10833b and reach the third extending claw part 10833a, it can flow down along the first downstream path O81 (or the right side surface of the third extending claw part 10833a in front view). be done.

On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 86(d) corresponds to a state in which the ball is arranged between the first extending claw part 10832a and the fourth extending claw part 10833b. That is, due to the weight of the ball, the second extending claw part 10832b and the third extending claw part 10833a are brought close to the main body member 10811, and the first extending claw part 10832a and the fourth extending claw part 10833b are moved away from the main body member 10811. Corresponds to the state of being separated.

In this case, the distance between the first extending claw part 10832a and the fourth extending claw part 10833b and the covering plate member 10820 is set to be less than or equal to the diameter of the sphere, and the direction changes from the right side of the direction changing member 10830 when viewed from the front. The ball that has reached the member 10830 (for example, has flown down along the flow path Y81) is unable to overcome the fourth extending claw portion 10833b.

As a result, when the ball is placed in front of the second extending claw part 10832b and the third extending claw part 10833a, the ball comes from the right side in front view (for example, flowing down along the flowing down path Y81). Since the ball can be prevented from entering the direction changing member 10830, when the ball that has flown down along the flow path Y81 is placed on the front side of the second extending claw part 10832b and the third extending claw part 10833a, By colliding with another ball that followed the ball and flowed down along the falling path Y81, the falling path of the ball that reached the front side of the second extending claw portion 10832b and the third extending claw portion 10833a first becomes the second ball. It is possible to prevent it from deviating from the first downstream path O81 (shifting to the left in FIG. 86(a)). Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the ball flowing down along the downstream path Y81 to enter the second winning hole (see FIG. 76).

Furthermore, in the state shown in FIGS. 86(c) and 86(d), the direction changing member 10830 is in a position where the first extending claw portion 10832a is close to the covering plate member 10820, so that the through gate 67 The ball that has passed through is made to flow easily in the longitudinal direction of the first extending claw portion 10832a. This makes it difficult for the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to enter the second prize opening 640b (see FIG. 76).

For example, when balls flow down the through gate 67 in a string, the first ball is allowed to flow down along the first flow path O81, and the orientation of the direction changing member 10830 is changed by the first ball. While the state changes to the state shown in FIG. 86(d), the second and subsequent balls can be easily flowed down along the longitudinal direction of the first extended claw portion 10832a, and the balls can be easily flowed down along the first downflow path O81. It is possible to suppress the flow of water. Thereby, when balls pass through the through gate 67 in a daisy chain, it is possible to prevent them from winning in the second prize opening 640b (see FIG. 76) in a daisy chain.

For example, if the configuration of the gaming area is such that balls can easily pass through the through gate 67 (for example, when 60% of the balls passing upstream of the through gate 67 pass through), the electric While making it easy to open the object 640a (see FIG. 73), some of the balls that pass through the through gate 67 in succession are prevented from entering the second prize opening 640b (see FIG. 73), and the ball enters the second prize opening 640b. By making the ball that does not pass through the through gate 67 (40% of the balls that pass upstream of the through gate 67) enter the ball, the profit given to the player becomes excessively large. can be suppressed.

On the other hand, for example, if the configuration of the gaming area is such that it is difficult for a ball to pass through the through gate 67 (for example, if only 10% of the balls flowing down the upstream side of the through gate 67 pass through), the through gate Even if the balls flowing down along the flow path Y81 without passing through the flow path Y81 collide with each other, the balls are prevented from being ejected to the left and leaving the second prize opening 640b, and when the electric accessory 640a is opened, a large number of balls ( By making it possible for 90% of the balls that pass upstream of the through gate 67 to win the second prize opening 640b, it is possible to secure the profit given to the player (the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open). (This prevents situations in which the ball does not pass even if the ball opens).

Therefore, irrespective of the state on the upstream side of the through gate 67 in the gaming area (the ease with which a ball passes through the through gate), it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from increasing or decreasing excessively.

The direction change member 10830 is manufactured by inserting the shaft member 10831 into the middle part (ring-shaped part) of the torsion spring 10834, and then inserting the cylindrical parts 10832 and 10833 from both ends of the shaft member 10831. For example, a method is illustrated in which the side surfaces of the cylindrical portions 10832 and 10833, which are arranged close to each other, are fitted together and bonded to each other.

As a result, even if the shape of each extending claw portion 10832a, 10832b, 10833a, 10833b is larger than the inner diameter of the intermediate portion (ring-shaped portion) of the torsion spring 10834, the direction can be changed as in this embodiment. A torsion spring 10834 can be placed in the middle portion of member 10830. Note that, as shown in FIG. 86(b), one end of the torsion spring 10834 is a recess provided in the base plate member 10810 (a recess extending downward from the middle portion of the rectangular recess 10813). It is arranged in such a way that it is buried in the

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87. In the eighth embodiment described above, the falling path of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 (for example, the first path Although the case where Y81 merges in the merge area S81 before reaching the first variable winning device 65 has been described, the channel forming unit 11800 in the eleventh embodiment The path X111 and the downstream paths Y81 and Y111 are formed so as to reach the first variable winning device 65 as separate and independent flow paths. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 87 is a partial front view of a flow path forming unit 11800 in the eleventh embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 87, illustration of the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 11820 is omitted, and the vertical wall portion 73b is partially illustrated.

The covering plate member 11820 includes a plate-shaped main body member 8821 (see FIG. 73) that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the front side of the main body member 8811 in an assembled state (see FIG. 2), and a plate-shaped main body member 8821 (see FIG. A plurality of raised portions 11822, 8823, 11824, and 8825 are arranged to face the front side of the recessed portion 8812 of the base plate member 8810 in the assembled state (see FIG. 3), and the rear side of the main body member 8821. and a direction changing portion 11826 provided in a protruding manner.

The plurality of raised parts are composed of a first raised part 11822, a second raised part 8823, a third raised part 11824, and a fourth raised part 8825, each of which has the same length (more than the diameter of the game ball). By raising the ball by the length), a channel through which the ball can flow is formed in the portion surrounded by the raised portions 11822, 8823, 11824, 8825 and the main body members 8811, 8821 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The first raised portion 11822 includes the housing portion 8822a described above in the eighth embodiment, the inclined surface portion 8822b, and a curved portion extending downward from the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 87) at the lower end of the housing portion 8822a. A wall portion 11822c.

The curved wall portion 11822c extends to a position where its extending tip is at the same position in the left-right direction as the vertical line passing through the right end of the third raised portion 11824. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upper side of the curved wall portion 11822c rolls on the upper side of the third raised portion 11824 and flows down.

The third raised part 11824 is a plate-shaped part that is arranged vertically below the left side surface (right side surface in FIG. 73) of the housing part 8822a in a front view and is inclined downwardly to the left at a predetermined distance. Further, the third raised portion 11824 is disposed below the extending tip of the curved wall portion 11822c, and its left end portion extends to near the outer frame of the main body member 8811. As a result, the game ball rolling on the upper side of the curved wall part 11822c will fall on the upper side of the third raised part 11824, and the game ball that subsequently rolled on the third raised part 11824 will fall outside the main body member 8811. It flows down above the plurality of nails P111 planted from the game board 13 on the outside of the frame.

In the present embodiment, the rolling plate Ia extends from the vicinity of the upper right portion of the outer frame of the lower board unit 300 in a downwardly inclined manner toward the left, and is integrally formed with the main body 311. It protrudes from the front toward the front.

The rolling plate Ia, like the third raising member 11824, is a part that rolls the game ball that arrives from above, and the gap between the game board 13 and the glass plate placed opposite to it is the diameter of the game ball. It is projected to the following positions. The right end of the rolling plate Ia is arranged below the nail arranged at the left end of the plurality of nails P111, and the left end of the rolling plate Ia is such that the vertical line passing through the left end It is arranged at a position passing to the left of the center position of the winning a prize opening 65a in the left-right direction.

The plurality of nails P111 are arranged in a downwardly inclined manner toward the left, and are arranged at intervals at which the game balls do not fall into the gaps between the nails P111 (for example, at intervals smaller than the radius of the game balls), The distance between the nail placed at the left end of the plurality of nails P111 and the rolling plate Ia is such that the game ball does not fall (for example, the distance below the radius of the game ball). The distance between the nail placed at the right end of the inside and the extended end of the third raised portion 11824 is set to a distance at which the game ball does not fall (for example, a distance equal to or less than the radius of the game ball).

With this configuration, among the game balls that pass through the through gate 67 and flow down on the flow path X111, the curved wall portion 11822c is rolled, and then the third raised portion 11824, the plurality of nails P111, It is possible to increase the proportion of game balls that sequentially pass above the rolling plate Ia and flow down. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the probability that a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 will subsequently win a prize in the second winning hole 640b.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down on the downstream path Y81 basically flows down toward the second winning opening 640b. When the game ball flowing down this downstream path Y81 bounces off the rolling wall surface 8825b, it passes through the back side of the direction changing part 11826.

As shown in FIG. 87, the direction changing portion 11826 is a plate-shaped portion that slopes downward toward the left, and its left end is to the right of the central axis of the opening formed by the pair of channel wall surfaces 8825d. placed on the side.

The direction changing part 11826, like the direction changing part 8826 in the eighth embodiment, is a part that bounces the arriving game ball in the front and back direction and the vertical and horizontal directions, so the game ball can pass between it and the recessed part 8812. It is protruded toward the back side with a gap.

In this embodiment, since the direction change part 11826 slopes downward as it goes to the left, many game balls that flow down the flow path Y81, bounce on the rolling wall surface 8825b, and reach the back side of the direction change part 11826 are In this case, it bounces back toward the lower right when viewed from the front or downward when viewed from the front. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game balls flowing down in the downstream path Y81 jump over the channel formed by the channel wall surface 8825d and do not go to the second winning opening 640b.

A general winning opening 63 is provided below the left end of the abutment wall surface 8825a in the vertical direction, where about 20% of the game balls that flowed down along the flow path Y111 win. For example, if the prize balls in the general prize opening 63 make it easier for game balls to head toward the downstream path X111 (more than half the way), the few game balls that pass through the downstream path Y81 may be Also, when the electric accessory 640a is closed, a game ball rolling and flowing down on the upper side of the electric accessory 640a (a game ball heading toward the second out port 315) has a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning hole 63. This not only improves the attention of the game ball, but also improves ball retention when hitting right-handed.

The game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 63 and flow down to the left are formed in such a manner that they flow down the front side of the first specific winning hole 65a, so when the first variable winning device 65 is open, In this case, the game ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a.

With this configuration, the game ball that does not pass through the through gate 67, rolls rightward on the upper surface of the inclined surface portion 8822b, and flows down in the flow path Y81, can enter the second prize opening in accordance with the gaming state. 640b (mainly in a time-saving state), the first specific winning hole 65a (mainly in a special game state), or the general winning hole 63, it is possible to win a prize with high frequency. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the proportion of game balls that do not pass through the through gate 67 and go directly to the second out port 315 among the game balls that have not yet given a profit to the player.

In this embodiment, in the special game state, both the game ball that passes through the through gate 67 and flows down on the downstream path X111, and the game ball that flows down on the downstream path Y81 without passing through the through gate 67, It is possible to win a prize. However, the degree of expectation (probability) of winning a prize differs depending on the route along which the game ball falls.

That is, both the game balls flowing down on the downstream path X111 and the game balls flowing down on the downstream paths Y81 and Y111 will flow down with a velocity facing leftward in the front, but the left end of the rolling plate Ia will be in the first specified position. Since it is arranged on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center position of the winning opening 65a in the left-right direction, the game ball that has flowed down on the flow path X111 and flowed down the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a in the open state is the first There are many situations in which the player does not enter the specific winning hole 65a obediently and deviates to the left.

On the other hand, the game balls flowing down on the downstream paths Y81 and Y111 pass through the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a near the right end of the first specific winning opening 65a, so the first variable winning device 65 which is opened After landing on the right end of the rolling surface (the upper surface (inner surface) of the door that opens in a manner that rotates toward the front with the lower end as an axis), the game ball rotates left and right until it is guided to the first specific prize opening 65a. A sufficient rolling distance can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that among the game balls that have flown down on the downstream path Y81, the game balls that have reached the front side of the first specific winning port 65a in the open state will win the first specific winning port 65a.

As a result, in this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can be configured in a manner that it is easier for the game ball that has missed the through gate 67 to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a. .

In other words, a ball that has flown down a path that passes through the through gate 67 (a highly advantageous path) has a high probability of subsequently flowing down a path that is less advantageous, and a ball that has flown down while avoiding the through gate 67 is The subsequent advantage is increased (it becomes easier to win the first specific winning hole 65a). Thereby, for example, if fraud is committed by adjusting a nail to make it easier to pass through the through gate 67, it is possible to reduce the increase in balls in the special game state (increase the number of useless balls flowing down the flow path X111). On the other hand, for example, if a nail adjustment is made that makes it difficult to pass through the through gate 67, many balls will flow down the falling path Y81 in the special game state, so you can play a jackpot game with almost no wasted balls. can be enjoyed.

That is, it is possible to prevent the advantage from becoming extremely high or low due to nail adjustment or the like. Based on this premise, in this embodiment, similarly to the eighth to tenth embodiments, the hole side selects whether to make the game play more focused on ball delivery or the game play more focused on the turnover rate. When making adjustments, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming erroneously extreme due to a slight difference in adjustment. This can improve the ease of adjustment.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the front rail portion 715 is formed from a single circular arc shape, but the front rail portion 715 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed of a plurality of circular arcs, and the directions of adjacent circular arcs may be reversed (wavy shape). In this case, since the slide movement speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed and the attitude of the effect member 620 is made unstable, it is possible to perform an effect that causes the effect member 620 to rattle.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the center of gravity of the presentation member 620 is vertically above the first shaft support 613 when the presentation member 620 forms an inverted state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity may be arranged diagonally above the first shaft support 613.

In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 is horizontal in the left-right direction, but the upper surface is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the outer side in the width direction. In this case, the velocity of the ball flowing into the upper surface of the lower left plate member 320 from the outside in the board width direction can be decelerated by the acceleration in the direction of gravity, and the deceleration time of the ball can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed as a long hole, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sliding hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the transmission member 640 may expand and contract to adjust the positional deviation between the sliding hole 643 and the sliding shaft portion 621a. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the position of the contact portion 644 can be switched between two positions, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously variable (movable). In this case, the rate of change in the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the attitude of the distal end swinging member 6556 changes between two positions, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the attitude of the tip swinging member 6556 may be changed in multiple stages. In this case, the amount of rocking of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be set to a plurality of types, and the variation of effects can be increased.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the cross-sectional shape of the recessed portion 8812 in a plane parallel to the vertical direction is an arc shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be recessed into a trapezoidal shape. In this case, by forming the upper and lower side surfaces of the recessed portion 8812 with trapezoidal inclined surfaces, the velocity of the ball that collides with the upper side surface can be changed downward. Further, the shape of the recessed portion 8812 may be made into an appropriate shape, and a buffer member such as urethane or rubber may be provided on the side surface of the recessed portion 8812. In this case, the speed of the ball colliding with the recessed portion 8812 can be easily reduced by the buffering effect of the buffering member.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the through gate 67 is disposed substantially vertically above the opening formed by the channel wall surface 8825d, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the through gate 67 may be arranged on the left side with respect to the opening formed by the channel wall surface 8825d, that is, on the downstream side of the contact wall surface 8825a. In this case, the arrangement of the members can prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second winning opening 640b.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the electric accessory 640a does not open or close in the special game state, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even in the special game state, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a may be opened. In this case, it is possible to increase the profits that the player can obtain in the special gaming state.

In the eighth embodiment, the ball is sorted as to whether it passes through the through gate 67 or not, and the ball that does not pass through the through gate 67 is made easier to pass through the second prize opening 640b. Although the case where the balance of granted benefits is maintained has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, separate through gates are arranged in both of the two allocated flow paths, and there is a difference in the profit given to the player for each through gate (for example, a difference in the probability of opening the electric accessory 640b due to the passage of a ball). ) may be provided. In addition, for example, separate winning holes are arranged in both of the two distributed channels, and by making the number of prize balls different for each of these separate winning holes, the profits given to the players are different. You can let it go.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the first variable winning device 65 is arranged at a position where the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can win, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement may be such that the through gate 67 and the first variable winning device 65 are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction so that the ball that passes through the through gate 67 cannot enter the first variable winning device 65. In this case, if the configuration of the gaming area is changed to a configuration that makes it easy for balls to pass through the through gate 67, it becomes difficult for balls to enter the first variable winning device 65. This will cause an intolerable problem for the user (the modification can be made easier to notice). This may cause dissatisfaction from players, and there is a risk that they will not be able to continue playing.Therefore, a person who attempts to illegally gain profits by changing the configuration of the gaming area may Modification can be suppressed.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of direction changing portions 8826 are provided protrudingly from the covering plate member 8820, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, of the four direction changing parts 8826, the two on the left side protrude from the covering plate member 8820 toward the back side, and the two on the right side protrude from the base plate member 8810 toward the front side. As shown in FIG. In this case, the game ball that came into contact with the two direction changing parts 8826 (first protruding part 8826a, second protruding part 8826b) on the left side and was pushed toward the back side was about to flow to the right. In this case, since it can be made easier to contact the two direction changing parts 8826 on the right side in the left-right direction, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to flow down along the first flow path O81.

In the eleventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the curved wall portion 11822c prevents the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from flowing down toward the direction changing portion 11826, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as described in the eighth embodiment, the direction changing section 11826 may be arranged in a gaming machine configured such that the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down toward the electric accessory 640a. In this case, by configuring the direction change part 11826 as a single protrusion, the design can be simplified, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 comes into contact with the upper surface of the direction change part 11826, and is prevented from passing through the through gate 67. Since the game ball that has flown down the upper surface of the inclined surface portion 8822b can be configured in such a manner that it comes into contact with the lower surface of the direction changing portion 11826, by devising the shape of the direction changing portion 11826, it is possible to , the influence on the game ball can be changed.

For example, the lower side surface of the direction changing portion 11826 may be configured as a flat surface, while the upper side surface may be configured as an upwardly convex curved surface. In this case, since the angle of the side surface of the direction changing portion 11826 that hits the game ball that deviates from the through gate 67 and falls is the same regardless of the height at which the game ball bounces, the game ball is uniformly (mechanically) bounced downward. It can be a mode. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and reached the direction change section 11826 is caused by a slight difference in the falling path due to a difference in the contact position with the direction change section 11826 (the game ball is brought out from the top surface of the direction change section 11826 at the contact position). (differences in the normal direction), and it is possible to create multiple types of ways the game ball bounces.

As a result, the game ball that bounced off the rolling wall surface 8825b is bounced downward (mechanically) at a uniform angle, and the period until the game ball reaches the second prize opening 640b is shortened regardless of the height of the bounce. On the other hand, since it is possible to prevent the movement (ball bounce) of the game ball passing through the through gate 67 from becoming uniform, the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball.

In addition, as the falling path of the game ball that bounces back after passing through the through gate 67 and colliding with the direction changing part 11826, the game ball lands on the fourth raised part 8825 at a position that deviates to the left of the upper opening of the channel wall surface 8825d. By forming a downstream path where the game ball lands at a position where the ball can enter the upper opening of the channel wall surface 8825d (for example, a position directly above the center position in the left-right direction of the electric accessory 640a), After passing through the through gate 67, it is possible to create an opportunity for the game ball to head toward the second prize opening 640b, and it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game ball.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Example of technical idea of changing driving force transmission by irregularly shaped elongated hole 553 of rotating arm member 550>
a crank member that is rotated about a first axis and has a protruding part protruding from a position eccentric to the first axis; and an insertion part through which the protruding part is inserted; a first position and a distance from the first position; an arm member formed to be movable between a second position and a drive device that generates a driving force that rotates the crank member around the first shaft; The driving force is transmitted to the arm member by the protrusion coming into contact with the inner circumferential surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protrusion, and the arm member is moved between the first position and the second position. A game machine comprising: a transmission area that is movable between positions; and a non-transmission area that is connected to the transmission area and where transmission of the driving force is interrupted. A1.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a crank member having a protrusion protruding from a rotating shaft at an eccentric position, and an arm member having an insertion part through which the protrusion of the crank member is inserted. There is a game machine in which an arm member moves in conjunction with the rotation of a crank member (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-000306). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked. Therefore, the arm member is driven from when the crank member is started, and it is not possible to shift the timing of starting the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member. In this case, when starting the crank member, a large force is required to overcome the inertia of the crank member and the arm member, resulting in a problem that the drive device becomes larger.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes a transmission region and a non-transmission region connected to the transmission region, the protrusion is inserted into the non-transmission region when cranked. By starting the member, the timing at which the arm member is driven and the timing at which the crank member is started can be shifted. That is, even when the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission region from the non-transmission region. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the driving force required at the time of starting the crank member, and it is possible to reduce the size of the drive device.

Note that while the protrusion moves in the non-transmission area, the arm member may be stopped or moved. For example, when the arm member is moved, it may be moved by gravity, elastic force generated by an auxiliary elastic spring, or the like.

Note that examples of the insertion portion include a bottomed recess-like depression, a penetrated elongated hole, and the like.

In gaming machine A1, the crank member is formed to be able to rotate one rotation or more, and the insertion portion becomes the transmission area when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction, while the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction. A game machine A2 comprising a selection area that becomes the non-transmission area when rotated in another rotation direction that is opposite to the first rotation direction.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member can be changed depending on the rotational direction of the crank member. As a result, by reversing the direction of the driving force of the drive device without changing the rotational speed of the crank member, it is possible to form two speed modes of the arm member when the crank members are arranged in the same phase. It is possible to increase the variation in speed of the arm member.

In gaming machine A2, the insertion portion is arranged such that the projection portion and an inner circumferential surface of the insertion portion that faces the movement direction of the projection portion when the crank member is rotated in the first rotation direction are separated from each other. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the selection area is formed by providing a margin section.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 has other effects for changing the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member, since the selection area is formed by the insertion portion having a margin. No members are required, and material costs can be reduced.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position and the second position is formed as a terminal position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the second position is formed as the terminal position. When the arm member is placed in one of the second positions, the arm member is directed toward the other opposite to either the first position or the second position, which is formed as the terminal position. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that a bounce suppressing mechanism for suppressing movement is formed.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A3, when the arm member is placed at either the first position or the second position formed as the end position of the movable range of the arm member, It is possible to suppress the driving force that the drive device needs to generate in order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other opposite side. Therefore, the durability of the drive device can be improved.

In addition, as a bounce suppression mechanism, the binding force of a magnet is used, the movement is suppressed with a claw-shaped member, and the arm is controlled in a manner in which the load received from the arm member by the protrusion of the crank member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member. An example is a case where an insertion portion for a member is formed.

In the case of attracting with a magnet, the magnet is required as a separate member, but it is possible to generate different magnitudes of attracting force depending on the internal composition of the magnet, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the case of suppressing the movement with a claw-shaped member, a drive device for operating the claw-shaped member is required, but the movement of the arm member can be mechanically stopped with the claw-shaped member.

When the insertion portion of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load that the protrusion of the crank member receives from the arm member is directed toward the axis of the crank member, there is no need to provide a separate member for suppressing movement of the arm member; Bounding of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

In gaming machine A4, when the arm member is arranged at at least one of the first position and the second position, the outer shape of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission area is A game machine A5 characterized in that the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by making the circumcircle of the protrusion substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A4, a bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is placed in the first position or the second position. This allows the arm member to smoothly change from a moving state to a stopped state.

In addition, in the bounce suppression mechanism, the load applied from the insertion part to the protrusion is directed toward the rotation axis of the crank member, so it is possible to suppress the load applied in the rotational direction of the crank member, thereby suppressing the load applied to the drive device. can do.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is placed at the first position, the outer shape of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission area is the same as that of the crank member. The circumcircle of the protrusion is approximately the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis, and a biasing force is applied to move the arm member from the first position to the second position, and the non-transmission area of the insertion portion is At least one of an inner recess projecting inside the insertion part or an outer recess projecting outside the insertion part having a size capable of accommodating the protrusion is formed on the side surface on the first position side. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is placed in the first position, the outer shape of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission area is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member, and a biasing force is applied to the arm member to move the arm member from the first position to the second position. In this case, the protrusion of the crank member is disposed in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, so that the protrusion prevents the arm member from moving, and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved through the non-transmission area, the arm member is moved when the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other. That is, when the protrusion is arranged to face the inner recess, the inner recess is pushed out by the protrusion, and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. Further, when the protrusion is disposed to face the outer recess, the protrusion is accommodated in the outer recess and the arm member is moved toward the crank member.

As a result, the protrusion of the crank member moves through the non-transmission area, resulting in a movement movement that is different in movement width from the movement movement of the arm member that occurs when the protrusion moves through the transmission area when the crank member is rotated. can be caused. Therefore, it is possible to both improve the durability of the drive device and change the movement width of the arm member.

That is, in order to change the movement width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the drive device according to the movement width of the arm member. In this case, the control burden on the drive device increases, and it is difficult to perform operations with a small movement width such as vibration.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A6, the protrusion of the crank member is moved through the non-transmission area and the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, thereby forming movements of the arm member with different movement widths. Ru. Therefore, the width of movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. Further, by narrowing the interval between adjacent inner recesses or outer recesses, the arm member can perform movements with a small movement width, such as vibration.

Note that the mode in which the protrusion can be accommodated may be a mode in which the entire protrusion is included in the recessed portion, or a mode in which a part of the protrusion is included in the recessed portion.

<An example of a technical concept in which the swing width of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is limited by the arc-shaped hole 554>
A movable member that is movable along a predetermined movement locus and can be placed in a first position and a second position that are different from each other; a stopper member that limits the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is placed in the first position or the second position; A gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising the following.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a movable member that is movably formed and a stopper member that limits the movement width of the movable member (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the stopper member is immovably fixed, so separate stopper members are prepared for when the movable member is placed at the first position and when the movable member is placed at the second position. Therefore, there was a problem that the space for arranging the stopper member was large.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine B1, the stopper member moves in correspondence with the movable member, so that the stopper member when the movable member is disposed at the first position is replaced with the stopper member when the movable member is disposed at the second position. It can also be used as a stopper member. Thereby, the space for arranging the stopper member can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the stopper member changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is placed in the first position or the second position, increasing the variation in the movement width of the movable member. be able to.

Examples of the stopper member include a protrusion that protrudes from the transmission member and comes into contact with the movable member, and an inner wall of a recess that is recessed in the transmission member and accommodates a portion of the movable member.

Note that examples of the mode of movement include linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, rocking, and rotational movement. In addition, the movement width in each mode of movement means, for example, the actual movement distance or the straight line distance between two points in the case of linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, etc. etc., it means the actual moving distance, moving angle, etc.

In the game machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is swingably supported on a first shaft and expands and contracts in the radial direction of the first shaft, and the movable member has an intermediate member that is movable between the first position and the second position. , the intermediate member has different expansion/contraction lengths, the predetermined locus of movement is formed in an arc shape centered on the first axis, and the stopper member is configured to extend when the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion/contraction state. A game machine B2 characterized in that the movable member extends along the predetermined movement locus.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the movable member is pivotally supported to be swingable about the first shaft and is formed to be able to extend and contract in the radial direction of the first shaft. Equipped with a member. Therefore, the radius of curvature of a predetermined movement locus of the movable member about the first axis can be changed depending on the length of the intermediate member in the expansion/contraction direction.

Here, the stopper member extends along a predetermined movement locus of the movable member when the intermediate member is in a predetermined telescopic state (the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member in a predetermined telescopic state) (The curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member in the case where the curvature is the same) In this case, when the intermediate member is brought into a predetermined expansion/contraction state, the movable member is moved along the stopper member, and the movable member can be moved in the direction in which the stopper member extends. Therefore, the movement width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

On the other hand, if the intermediate member is placed in an elastic state different from the predetermined elastic state, the curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member and the curvature of the stopper member in the extending direction can be made different, and the predetermined movement of the movable member can be made different. The locus can intersect with the direction in which the stopper member extends. Therefore, the movement width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, by changing the expansion/contraction state of the intermediate member, the movement width of the movable member can be changed.

In gaming machine B2, the movable member includes a protrusion protruding toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted, and the protrusion is inserted into the insertion portion. A game machine B3 characterized in that, in the inserted state, the movable member and the stopper member move in a direction of expansion and contraction of the intermediate member, and the movable member is brought into contact with the insertion portion.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B2, the protruding part of the movable member is inserted into the insertion part of the stopper member, so that the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked in the direction of expansion and contraction of the intermediate member. , the drive device for expanding and contracting the movable member and the drive device for moving the stopper member can be used together. Further, the insertion portion restricts movement of the movable member by coming into contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has the function of a stopper that restricts the movement of the movable member and the function of interlocking the movable member and the stopper member. This makes it possible to centralize functions.

A gaming machine B4 in the gaming machine B3, wherein the intermediate member expands and contracts so that the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner circumferential side and the outer circumferential side.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B3, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner circumferential side and the outer circumferential side due to the expansion and contraction of the intermediate member. Thereby, the movement width of the movable member can be changed depending on whether the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion part or the case where the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion part.

That is, when the first axis is arranged on the inner circumferential side of the insertion part (when the movement locus of the protrusion follows the shape of the insertion part when the movable member is moved along a predetermined movement locus), the protrusion The movement trajectory and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first axis is arranged on the outer circumferential side of the insertion part (when the movement trajectory of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along a predetermined movement trajectory is approximately reversed to the shape of the insertion part), the protrusion The angle formed between the locus of movement and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion becomes larger, and the width of movement of the predetermined locus of movement of the movable member can be narrowed.

In gaming machine B3 or B4, the insertion part is formed to be able to change its posture while maintaining the expansion and contraction state of the intermediate member, and the position of the insertion part changes to change the position of contact between the movable member and the insertion part. A game machine B5 characterized in that the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member changes.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B3 or B4, the position of contact between the movable member and the insertion part changes by changing the posture of the insertion part while maintaining the expanded/contracted state of the intermediate member. In this case, the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be changed while the intermediate member is maintained in an expanded/contracted state.

In any one of game machines B3 to B5, the insertion part includes a groove part that allows the projection part to move in and out along the movement locus, and the projection part is separated from the insertion part via the groove part. A gaming machine B6, wherein the movable member is provided with a positioning auxiliary part that is engaged with the stopper member in the separated state.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines B3 to B5, it is possible to form a separated state in which the protrusion is separated from the insertion part via the groove, and the movable member can be moved in the separated state. A positioning aid is provided which is engaged with the stopper member. Therefore, compared to the operating range of the movable member, the formation range of the stopper member can be made smaller, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the positional deviation between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be reduced. It can be prevented. That is, even if the protrusion is separated from the insertion part of the stopper member, the positioning assisting part suppresses the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member, so that the protrusion can be returned to the insertion part again.

<An example of a technical idea for supporting an inverted performance member 620 at two points>
a base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member and moves upward from a predetermined position, a drive device that generates a driving force to displace the movable member, and a drive device that is connected to the movable member. and a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated from the drive device to the movable member, the transmission member being swingably supported on a shaft support formed in the base member, A game machine C1 characterized in that the length from the pivot support to the connection position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the support part to the connection position of the movable member and the transmission member. .

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support part formed on a base member and moves upward from a predetermined position is driven by transmission of driving force by a gear (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the drive device is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution (for example, one step in the case of a stepping motor), the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member is It is proportional to the length from to the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, the farther the center of gravity of the movable member is from the support portion in the radial direction, the more difficult it becomes to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the movable member.

In addition, when the center of gravity of the movable member shifts to one side from an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is placed directly above the support part, a driving force is generated to displace the movable member in the opposite direction, and the movable member is inverted. Even if an attempt is made to maintain this state, if the center of gravity shifts to the other side due to the driving force, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity will match, and the movable member will be significantly displaced.

Therefore, there is a problem in that the longer the movable member becomes in the radial direction of the support portion, the more difficult it becomes to keep the movable member still in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is located directly above the support portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the drive device to the movable member to move the movable member upwardly is supported by the shaft support of the base member and is connected to the movable member, The length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the pivot support is formed shorter than the length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the support part. Therefore, even if the movable member is long in the radial direction of the support part, it is possible to suppress the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated at the minimum unit of control resolution of the drive device. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily keep the movable member stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is located directly above the support portion.

Note that the movable member is supported by the base member, including a manner in which the movable member is pivotably supported by the base member, a manner in which the movable member is supported in a slidable manner by the base member, and a manner in which the movable member is supported by the base member in a slidable manner. A combined aspect is exemplified.

In the game machine C1, the arm length of the transmission member from the pivot support to the connection position with the movable member is shortened as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, as the movable member displaced around the support portion moves upward from a predetermined position, the transmission member from the pivot support to the connection position with the movable member increases. Arm length is shortened. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved compared to the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant.

For example, when the drive device that rotates the transmission member operates at a constant rotational speed, there are cases where the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length, and cases where the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length. The explanation will be made assuming that the second length is fixed at a second length shorter than the length of . When the rotation speed of the drive device is constant, the transmission is faster when the transmission member is fixed at the first length than when the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at the second length. When the members are arranged in a predetermined phase, the moving speed of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes faster.

Here, near a predetermined position, the movable member is moved quickly at the speed that would occur if the transmission member had the first arm length, and near the inverted state, the movable member would operate at the speed that would occur if the transmission member had the second arm length. Consider the case where you want to move a movable member slowly. One possible method for this is to change the rotation speed of the drive device midway through, but this cannot be adopted if it is difficult to change the rotation speed of the drive device. In addition, even if the rotation speed of the drive device can be changed, changing the rotation speed midway requires a detection sensor to detect the timing of the change, which increases costs. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the length of the arm from the shaft support where the transmission member is supported to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is such that the transmission member is at a predetermined position. It is formed in such a manner that it becomes shorter as it moves upwards. Therefore, the transmission member can be set to the first arm length near a predetermined position, and the transmission member can be set to the second arm length near the inverted state, so the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. .

An example of a configuration in which the length of the arm from the shaft support to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is fixed is a case where a protrusion protruding from the transmission member is inserted through and connected to the movable member. Ru. In addition, configurations in which the length of the arms can be changed include cases in which a long hole is formed in the transmission member and a protrusion protruding from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole in the transmission member; An example is a case where the member is provided with an elongated hole in a portion supported by the support portion, and an insertion shaft is formed to be inserted through the elongated hole from the base member.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the movable member includes a protrusion protruding in a direction parallel to the support part, and the transmission member is a long hole extending in the radial direction of the shaft support. A game machine C3 comprising an insertion part through which the protrusion is inserted.

In the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the insertion part extends in the radial direction of the shaft support, and the protrusion of the transmission member is inserted into the insertion part, so that the transmission member and the movable member can be connected to each other. are connected, so the direction of movement of the connected position is limited to the radial direction of the shaft support. Therefore, as the transmission arm swings, the length from the shaft support to the connection position of the transmission member with the movable member can be mechanically changed.

Note that examples of the insertion portion include a long hole formed through the hole, a concave portion formed as a bottomed depression, and the like.

In the gaming machine C3, the pivot support is arranged vertically above the supporting part, and the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged on a straight line connecting the supporting part and the projection part.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C3, when the movable member assumes a posture in which the protrusion is disposed vertically above the support, the center of gravity of the support, the shaft support, the protrusion, and the movable member is Formed on a vertical line. In this case, the gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is applied vertically downward to the support portion and the pivot support. Therefore, since no rotational force is applied to the movable member, the posture of the movable member can be maintained even if the power of the drive device is cut off. Thereby, the load on the drive device can be reduced.

A game machine C5 is characterized in that in the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is reduced by the worm gear.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is decelerated by the worm gear, so that the drive device can be controlled. The width of movement of the movable member can be significantly reduced when operating with a minimum resolution of . In addition, since the direction of force transmission via the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive device side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to a load from the transmission member side, and the drive device It is possible to reduce the load placed on the drive device when the vehicle is stopped.

Any one of gaming machines C1 to C5 includes a biasing device that generates a biasing force in both directions of displacement of the movable member to move the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion, and the biasing force is A game machine C6 characterized in that the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the displacement direction in an inverted state arranged vertically above the support part, and becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the biasing device generates a biasing force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion, and the biasing force is generated so that the center of gravity of the movable member moves above the support portion. The larger the movable member is displaced from the state where it is disposed vertically above the support portion (inverted state). That is, the biasing force can be minimized in the inverted state.

Therefore, by increasing the biasing force when moving the movable member upward from a predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive device that moves the movable member upward from the state where the movable member is disposed at the predetermined position.

Further, the biasing force is generated in both directions of the displacement direction of the movable member, and is balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved upward from a predetermined position and the drive device is controlled to stop, even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes through the inverted state, the biasing force changes the posture of the movable member to the inverted state. can be directed to. This makes it easy to stop the movable member in an inverted state.

In the gaming machine C6, the movable member is capable of forming a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount from vertically above the support portion, and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by more than the predetermined amount, and A gaming machine C7 characterized in that the rate of change in the biasing force when the displacement is the same is greater in the second state than in the first state.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the movable member is moved by a predetermined amount larger than the first state on the inverted state side in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support part. In the second state of displacement, the rate of change in the biasing force when the displacement is the same is greater. In this case, when starting the movable member from the state in which the movable member is disposed in the second state, the load on the drive device at the time of starting can be suppressed. Further, since the acceleration of the movable member when the movable member is placed near the inverted state can be reduced, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in the inverted state.

<An example of a technical idea in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during swinging>
A movable member configured to be movable between a first position and a second position, a drive device that generates a driving force to move the movable member, and a biasing force that returns the movable member to the first position. In the gaming machine, the movable member generates a biasing force with respect to a rate of change in the biasing force that occurs when the movable member is disposed in a first biasing region from the first position to a predetermined position. The rate of change in the biasing force that occurs when the member is placed in a second biasing region that is connected to the first biasing region and is formed away from the first position is formed to be large. A gaming machine D1 is characterized by the following.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that use a biasing force from a biasing device such as an elastic spring as an auxiliary force when a movable member is moved by a driving force generated by a drive device (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 (Refer to Publication No.-120640). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the biasing force of the biasing device is increased in proportion to the amount of displacement of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the biasing device depending on the arrangement of the movable member. There was a problem that. That is, it is difficult to make the movement of the movable member more flexible by suppressing the urging force in a certain area, and to increase the urging force and make the movement of the movable member more rapid in another area.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the rate of change in the biasing force biased toward the first position is higher than when the movable member is disposed in the first biasing region. It is made larger when placed in the active area. That is, for example, when starting the movable member stopped at the second position toward the first position (second biasing region), sufficient biasing force can be obtained by the biasing device, while the movable member stops at the first position. When placed in the biasing region, changes in biasing force are suppressed and the movement of the movable member can be made more flexible (gentle).

Note that the rate of change in the biasing force of the biasing device is changed depending on the arrangement of the movable members, such as when the number of biasing devices that generate a biasing amount to the movable member increases midway, or when the biasing device is An example is a case where the elastic spring is formed of an elastic spring and the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed depending on the arrangement of the movable member.

In the gaming machine D1, the biasing device is a pair of elongated members disposed on a pair of surfaces that intersect with the moving direction of the movable member and sandwich the movable member in the moving direction, and the biasing device is a pair of elongated members disposed on a pair of surfaces that intersect with the moving direction of the movable member and sandwich the movable member in the moving direction, The movable member is formed of an elastic spring that is arranged to face each other on both sides of the movable member and whose other end, which is the opposite end of the one end, is restrained from moving. a main body portion sandwiched between a pair of elongated members; a main body portion formed on the opposite side of the main body portion with respect to the pair of elongate members; an abutting part formed to be able to come into contact with each other, the abutting part is connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is placed in the first biasing region, the movable member Among the elongated members, as the movable member moves, one of the elongated members on the side closer to the movable member is brought into contact and a biasing force is applied, and the movable member is pressed against the other elongated member. A game machine D2 characterized in that the contact portion is brought into contact with the contact portion and a biasing force is applied thereto.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the change in the rate of change in the biasing force by the biasing device is caused by shifting the contact timing between the movable member and the pair of elongated members for each elongated member. It can be formed by Therefore, it is not necessary to change the biasing force of the biasing device through control or to prepare a separate member to improve the biasing force.

That is, since the movement of the other end of the pair of elongated members is restricted, the one elongated member on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moves; The other elongate member on the opposite side receives no force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first biasing region, when the movable member moves, the other elongated member disposed on the opposite side of the moving direction of the movable member remains in place.

On the other hand, in the second biasing region, by moving the movable member, the other elongated member is brought into contact with the contact portion. As a result, biasing force is also generated from the other elongated member. Therefore, the biasing force applied to the movable member in the second biasing region can be increased.

Note that examples of the elastic spring include a coil spring, a torsion spring, and a plate spring.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the biasing device is a pair of elongated members disposed on a pair of surfaces that intersect with the moving direction of the movable member and sandwich the movable member in the moving direction, and one of the biasing devices is The movable member is formed of an elastic spring whose ends are arranged opposite to each other on both sides of the movable member, and whose other end, which is the end opposite to the one end, is restrained from moving. , a main body sandwiched between the pair of elongate members, and at least one of the pair of elongate members formed on the opposite side of the main body with respect to the pair of elongate members and in the moving direction of the main body. and a contact part formed to be able to come into contact with the movable member, the contact part being connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is placed in the first biasing region, the movable member Of the pair of elongated members, as the movable member moves, one of the elongated members on the side closer to the movable member comes into contact and is given a biasing force, and the movable member is subjected to the second biasing force. A game machine D3 characterized in that when placed in the area, an intermediate portion of the one elongated member is pressed against an abutting portion placed on the one elongated member side with respect to the main body portion.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1 or D2, the change rate of the biasing force is changed by pressing the intermediate portion of one elongated member against the contact portion. That is, one elongated member, which has already been deformed by the movement of the movable member, is further deformed starting from the intermediate portion pressed against the abutting portion, thereby causing a change in the rate of change in the biasing force. Here, when the deformation starts from the middle part, the length of the part undergoing deformation is shorter than when the deformation starts from the other end, so the ratio of change in the biasing force to the amount of movement of the movable member becomes smaller. increase Thereby, in the second biasing region, it is possible to increase the change in biasing force with respect to the amount of movement of the movable member. Therefore, the rate of change in the biasing force can be increased.

In the gaming machine D3, the one elongated member is provided with a first bending point that is bent toward the contact portion that is arranged opposite to each other, and at the first bending point, the one elongated member A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is pressed against a contact portion.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, one elongated member is brought into contact with the contact portions disposed opposite each other at the first bending point, so that the one elongated member is brought into contact. It is stretched by contact with the part. Therefore, the tip of the biasing device that applies biasing force to the movable member can be moved away from the other end of the elongated member or the first bending point, which is the starting point of the biasing force. Therefore, the moment applied to the movable member by the biasing device in the second biasing region can be increased.

In the gaming machine D4, the movable member includes a distal end enlarged region that is enlarged in the moving direction as it moves away from the other end of the elongated member, and in the distal enlarged region, one of the movable member and the elongated member The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the end portion of the gaming machine D5 is brought into contact with the end portion of the gaming machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D4, the movable member includes an enlarged tip region, and the movable member and one end of the elongated member abut in the enlarged tip region. Therefore, when one elongated member is stretched by being pressed against the contact portion, the contact position between the movable member and the elongated member separates from the other end of the elongated member. direction, and the amount of deformation of the elongated member is increased. Therefore, the urging force applied from the urging device to the movable member can be increased.

A gaming machine D6 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D2 to D5, variations in the change in the biasing force generated by the elongated member can be increased. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the biasing force of the elongated member increases can be set earlier.

<An example of a technical idea in which a plurality of outlet ports are provided and a buffer rib 322 is formed on the lower plate 320>
Inside the game area where the ball can flow down, there is an in-board accessory that is placed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and an in-board accessory that is formed on one side in the width direction of the in-board accessory that allows the ball to flow down the game area. a first out port that is an opening for discharging balls from the playing area; and a second out port that is an opening that is formed on the other side in the width direction of the in-board accessory, which is the opposite side to the one side in the width direction, and that is an opening for discharging balls from the gaming area. In the gaming machine, the first out port and the second out port include a lower plate portion extending from the lower side of the opening to the front and having a guide surface on the upper surface, and the lower plate portion has a guide surface. The surface is provided with a buffer rib that extends in a rib shape toward the opening of the corresponding side of the first outlet or the second outlet, and is raised from the guide surface on the outside in the width direction. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the aspect ratio of the buffer rib is formed to become smaller toward the outside in the width direction.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of exits (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-192301). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is preferable to reduce the size of each outlet to accommodate the increase in the number of output outlets, as this allows space for the attacker etc. However, if the outlet is made too small, There was a problem in that the ejection of game balls could be delayed.

For example, if the height at which the ball bounces up and down in front of the outlet exceeds the vertical width of the outlet, the ball will stay in front of the outlet. Further, for example, if a side surface is arranged on the side surface of the accessory in the width direction of the outlet to form a wall, a ball that flows into the front side of the outlet from the width direction collides with the side surface of the accessory and bounces back in the width direction. At this time, if the amount of bounce in the width direction exceeds the width of the out port, the ball will stay in front of the out port.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the buffer ribs are formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate part, it is possible to suppress the rebound of the ball and to slow down the ball. That is, when a ball collides with the ball from above or below, the buffer ribs bend and deform, so that the buffer ribs act as a cushion and can suppress the ball from bouncing back. Furthermore, when a ball collides from the left or right, the ball gets stuck in the buffer rib and is braked.

Here, the buffer ribs extending in the opening direction are susceptible to loads from the left and right directions, and may be damaged by collisions of balls from the left and right directions.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the guide surface has a stepped portion on the outside in the width direction, a ball flowing down from the left and right toward the buffer rib will fall onto the buffer rib from above the stepped portion. . In this case, the vertical component of the direction in which the ball collides with the buffer rib can be increased, and damage to the buffer rib can be suppressed.

In addition, since the stepped portion has a function of blocking the ball moving in the left-right direction on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the ball moving on the guide surface from bouncing back beyond the width of the outlet.

Since the buffer ribs are formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game area, a large rebound suppressing effect can be obtained near the center in the width direction of the game area where falling balls tend to concentrate. This allows the ball to be smoothly ejected from the outlet. Furthermore, by aligning the curve of the lower side of the gaming area with the lower surface of the buffer rib, the position of the outlet can be adjusted downward.

Here, the reason why the higher the height of the buffer ribs is, the greater the effect of suppressing the rebound of the ball is because the amount of deflection of the buffer ribs becomes larger. In other words, the larger the amount of deflection of the buffer ribs, the more the cushioning effect works, making it easier to suppress rebound. Therefore, it is preferable to make the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs constant in the left-right direction (make the length in the vertical direction constant) for the rebound suppressing effect.

On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs is kept constant (the length in the vertical direction is constant), it is necessary to increase the height of the stepped portion, and the path of the ball to reach the stepped portion is also upward. As a result, the gaming area is narrowed, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer ribs is made smaller on the outer widthwise side of the playing area where falling balls are difficult to concentrate, and at the widthwise center of the playing area where falling balls are more likely to concentrate. In this case, the aspect ratio (vertical length) of the buffer ribs is increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of discharging balls and secure the playing area at the same time.

Note that "extending in the opening direction" is not particularly limited, and means extending in a linear, wavy, chevron, or other shape along the opening direction.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the guide surface includes an outwardly sloped portion that slopes downwardly toward the outside in the width direction of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, since the guide surface is provided with an outwardly inclined part, the speed of the ball flowing into the guide surface from the outside in the width direction can be reduced by gravitational acceleration, and the speed of the ball can be reduced by the gravitational acceleration. Deceleration time can be shortened.

A gaming machine E3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1 or E2, a non-flowing area in which a ball cannot flow down is formed obliquely above at least one of the first outlet or the second outlet.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E1 or E2, the flow of the ball diagonally downward from the non-flow area toward the guide surface is restricted, so that the flow of the ball to the guide surface is restricted. The number of routes can be reduced. Therefore, the direction in which the falling ball bounces back can be narrowed. Thereby, the outer shape of at least one of the first outlet and the second outlet can be narrowed.

In the gaming machine E3, in the non-flowing area, an opening/closing device disposed in the gaming area and capable of opening and closing toward the front side is disposed above at least one of the first outlet or the second outlet. , a gaming machine E4 characterized in that it is formed on the front side of the opening/closing device.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, a non-flowing area is formed by the opening/closing device. Thereby, the space created by suppressing the opening size of the first outlet or the second outlet in the direction toward the non-flowing area can be used as a space for installing the opening/closing device.

In addition, when the opening/closing device is in the closed state, the ball flowing down in front of the opening/closing device flows downward to the gaming area, and in the open state, the ball flowing down in front of the opening/closing device is directed to the rear of the gaming area. It has the function of flowing down. Therefore, compared to the case where the ball flows down irregularly due to collision with a nail or the like, the non-flowing region can be formed more reliably.

A gaming machine E5, which is any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, and includes a direction adjustment rib extending in the opening direction in a rib shape on the upper bottom surface of the first outlet or the second outlet.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a direction adjustment rib is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first outlet or the second outlet in a rib shape extending in the opening direction. , it is possible to suppress resistance to the ball flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first outlet or the second outlet.

<An example of a technical concept for adjusting the advantage of each flow path>
a distributing means disposed in a gaming area through which the game balls flow and for distributing the game balls to two channels, a first channel or a second channel; a first profit means that allows a game ball to pass through and gives a profit to a player as the game ball passes; a second profit means for giving a profit to the player by A gaming machine F1 characterized in that a proportion going to the second profit means is increased.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a guideway through which game balls that pass through a through gate are guided to the starting winning hole, and the proportion of winnings from the guiding path to the starting winning hole can be adjusted (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 2001-70526). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the ball that passes through the through gate has a high advantage (it opens the starting winning hole and has a high possibility of entering the starting winning hole), and the ball that does not pass through the through gate has a high advantage. The rate is low (the starting winning slot remains closed, so there is a low possibility of winning the starting winning slot), and whether or not it is easy to pass through the through gate directly leads to the player's profit. There was a problem in that the player's profit greatly increased or decreased depending on how much the ball was guided.

In other words, if it is difficult for the ball to reach the through gate, the player will not receive any profit to the extent that the player feels uncomfortable, and conversely, if the ball is easy to reach the through gate, the prize ball will be extremely low. If the number increases, there is a risk that the profits of the game parlor will be lost. Therefore, for example, if the flow path of the ball is adjusted so that it is easier for the ball to go to the through gate due to the act of bending a nail, etc., it becomes difficult to maintain a balance between the interests of the player and the interests of the game arcade. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the game ball passing through the first flow path is more likely to pass through the second profit means than the game ball passing through the second flow path, which may pass through the first profit means. Since the proportion of the game balls going to the second flow path is increased, the profit is naturally adjusted between the case where the game balls are brought to the second flow path and the case where the game balls are brought to the first flow path, and the game balls are brought to the first flow path. It is possible to prevent the profit balance between players and game parlors from being extremely disrupted between cases where it is easy to go to the second flow path and cases where it is easy to go to the first flow path.

Note that the benefits given to the player are not particularly limited, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the benefits given to the player include obtaining a prize ball, opening an electric accessory that closes the starting port with a certain probability, and the like.

The gaming machine F1 is capable of forming a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the second profit means includes an open state through which a gaming ball can pass, and an open state where a gaming ball can pass through. The state is switched between a closed state in which passage is not possible, and the profit given to the player by the game ball passing through the first profit means is obtained when the second profit means is in the open state in the first gaming state. In the second gaming state, the second profit means is switched to an open state regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the first profit means. Gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, when many gaming balls are distributed to the second channel, more gaming balls can pass through the first profit means in the first gaming state. It is possible to form a game property in which the game player is advantageous because it becomes easier to release the profit means, but disadvantageous because the number of wasted balls that pass through the second flow path and do not pass through the second profit means increases in the second game state. When a large number of game balls are distributed to one flow path, there is a disadvantage in that fewer game balls pass through the first profit means in the first game state, making it difficult for the second profit means to release; It is possible to form a game that is advantageous to the extent that the game balls that are distributed to the first flow path in large numbers can be passed through the second profit means without waste in the current state.

In other words, even if there is a bias in the allocation of the allocating means, it is possible to switch between advantage and disadvantage by changing the gaming state, so even if the player's profit in one gaming state decreases, the player's profit in the other playing state decreases. By increasing the player's profit in the gaming state, the player's profit can be balanced. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a large increase or decrease in the player's profit due to bias in the adjustment of the allocating means.

The gaming machine F1 or F2 includes a changing means disposed on the upstream side of the first flow path of the second profit means, and the changing means changes the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first flow path. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that it is formed in a manner that changes in a direction toward a second profit means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the changing means changes the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down the first channel toward the second profit means. Even if the game ball deviates from the second profit means and flows down on the upstream side of the changing means, the downstream direction of the game ball can be changed to the downstream direction facing the second profit means on the downstream side of the changing means. can. Thereby, it is possible to increase the proportion of game balls that have flowed down the first channel (game balls that have not passed through the first profit means) to pass through the second profit means.

Any of the gaming machines F1 to F3 includes a changing means disposed at a position through which the game ball that has passed the first profit means passes while heading toward the second profit means, the second profit means comprising: The state is switched between an open state through which the game ball can pass and a closed state through which the game ball cannot pass, and the profit given to the player by the game ball passing through the first profit means is the same as the first profit means. In one gaming state, the second profit means is switched to an open state, and the changing means is configured to change the game ball that has passed through the first profit means to the second profit with the passage of the game ball as an opportunity. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the flowing manner of the game ball is changed so that the game ball flows down in such a manner that it reaches the second profit means after the means is in an open state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the second profit means is in an open state before the changing means reaches the second profit means from the first profit means. , since the falling mode of the game ball is changed (for example, decelerated), the game ball that has passed through the first profit means is transferred directly to the second profit means while narrowing the arrangement interval between the first profit means and the second profit means. can be passed through. As a result, it is possible to increase the value of the game balls passing through the first profit means and reduce wasted balls, and also to shorten the arrangement interval of the first profit means and the second profit means, and to suppress the installation space. Can be done.

For example, if the profit given to the player by a game ball passing through the second profit means is a special symbol lottery, the first profit can be increased by narrowing the distance between the first profit means and the second profit means. Since the period until the game balls that have passed through the means pass through the second profit means can be shortened, the game balls can be made to pass through the second profit means one after another. According to this configuration, while aiming to increase the frequency of the lottery by extremely shortening the fluctuations related to the special symbol lottery, the ball does not pass through the second profit means during the free time that occurs between the fluctuations. It is possible to avoid a situation where the player becomes bored.

In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the changing means includes a first changing path for causing the game balls distributed to the second flow path to flow down in a direction away from the second profit means, and a first changing path for causing the game balls distributed to the second flow path to flow down in a direction away from the second profit means. a second changing path for causing the game ball to flow down in a direction toward the second profit means, and decelerating the game ball when the game ball passes through the second changing path. F5.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F3 or F4, the displacement means provides a first changing path in which a part of the game balls distributed to the second channel flows down in a direction deviating from the second profit means. and a second changing path that slows down the game ball heading toward the second profit means, so the balls flowing down on the first changing path actively create dead balls while flowing down on the second changing path. It is possible to make it easier for the ball to pass through the second profit means. Thereby, it is possible to actively make the minimum number of balls dead while giving a certain amount of profit to the player. Note that a dead ball refers to a ball that enters the out hole without tangling with the prize ball and is ejected.

In any of gaming machines F3 to F5, the changing means is formed from an overhanging portion that overhangs inward of the gaming area along the thickness direction of the game board; A game machine F6 characterized in that a game ball is allowed to pass through the area.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F3 to F5, the game ball can pass through a region of the changing means that is formed to protrude in the thickness direction of the game board, so that the game Compared to the case where the area through which the ball can pass is narrowed and the speed is reduced (for example, when nails are planted), the width of the channel through which the game ball can pass can be maintained large. As a result, even if game balls flow into the changing means from multiple directions, it is possible to suppress the installation space of the changing means and to prevent the slowed down game balls from staying and clogging the balls.

In addition, by using a member that cannot be easily deformed unlike a nail (for example, using a member similar to the plastic member that forms the game board), it is possible to improve the gameplay by using a member similar to the act of deforming a nail. can be prevented from changing.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a merging area where the game balls sorted by the sorting flow path merge again, and a discharge port that discharges the game balls that have flowed into the merging area toward an out port; A game machine F7, characterized in that the inflow direction of game balls flowing from the first flow path into the merging area is a direction away from the discharge port.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F1 to F6, the inflow direction of the game balls flowing from the first channel into the merging area is the direction away from the discharge port, so that the first It is possible to suppress the game balls that have flowed into the confluence area from the flow path from being discharged from the discharge port. As a result, it is possible to reduce the rate at which game balls flowing down the first flow path are discharged to the discharge port, and as a result, the rate at which game balls flowing down the first flow path pass through the second profit means is increased. can be done.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7 is provided with a changing means disposed upstream of the second profit means and arranged so that the game ball that has passed through the first profit means can pass therethrough, A gaming machine F8 characterized in that a profit means, a second profit means, and the changing means are configured as one unit.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, since the first profit means, the second profit means, and the changing means are configured as one unit, the first profit means and Compared to the case where a nail or the like is arranged between the first benefit means and the second benefit means to form a spherical flow path, the installation space for the first benefit means and the second benefit means can be reduced. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing other parts of the gaming area can be improved.

Moreover, by being configured as one unit, it is possible to suppress changes in the relative positional relationship between the first profit means, the second profit means, and the changing means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down a path different from the designed intention due to a change in the relative positional relationship between the first benefit means, the second benefit means, and the changing means.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, and F1 to F8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, and F1 to F8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, and F1 to F8, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Features of gaming machine Z3. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that have a winning opening in the gaming area, balls can reach the winning opening from multiple directions, and can win prizes (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218) .
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement in the flow of the ball into the winning hole.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine in which balls can flow smoothly into the winning opening.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 is arranged in a gaming area where game balls flow down, and distributes game balls into two flow paths, a first flow path or a second flow path. means, a first profit means that allows the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the distribution means and provides a profit to the player by the passage of the game balls; A gaming machine comprising a second profit means through which game balls passing downstream are allowed to pass and which provides a profit to a player by the passage of the game balls, the game balls distributed to the second flow path. Rather, the proportion of game balls distributed to the first flow path heading toward the second profit means is increased.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, which is capable of forming a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the second profit means is , the state is switched between an open state where a game ball can pass through and a closed state where a game ball cannot pass through, and the profit given to the player by the game ball passing through the first profit means is as follows: In the first gaming state, the second profit means is switched to an open state, and in the second gaming state, the second profit means is set when a game ball passes through the first profit means. It switches to the open state regardless of whether it is open or not.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, comprising a changing means disposed upstream of the second profit means in the first flow path, and the changing means , is formed in such a manner that the downward direction of the game ball flowing down the first channel is changed to the direction toward the second profit means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is possible to improve the flow of the ball to the winning hole.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, it is possible to associate the falling manner of the ball with the gaming state.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, it is possible to further improve the falling of the ball.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board 65 First variable winning device (opening/closing device, part of second profit means)
67 Through gate (first profit means)
640a Electric accessory 640b 2nd winning opening (winning opening, part of the 2nd profit means)
313 Movable performance parts (in-board accessories)
314 First out port 315 Second out port 315a Guide rib (direction adjustment rib)
320 Lower left plate member (lower plate part)
322 Buffer rib 324 Step portion 330 Lower right plate member (lower plate part)
332 Buffer rib 512 First shaft portion (first shaft)
540, 6540 Telescopic effect device (movable member)
541 Main body member (part of intermediate member)
544 Slide plate (part of intermediate member)
545 Slide rail (part of intermediate member)
541b Projection 541e Guide fastening part (positioning auxiliary part)
550, 5550, 6550 Rotating arm member (arm member, stopper member)
553 Irregular long hole (insertion part)
553d Selection wall section (selection area)
554 Arc-shaped hole (insertion part)
554a Tip of mouth (groove)
554b First stopper surface (part of insertion part)
554c Second stopper surface (part of insertion part)
560 Second drive device (drive device)
570 Rotating crank member (crank member)
574 Sliding protrusion (protrusion)
610, 7610 Base member 613 First shaft support hole (support part)
614 2nd shaft support hole (shaft support)
620, 4620 Performance member (movable member)
621a Sliding shaft (protrusion)
630 First drive device (drive device)
640, 2640, 3640, 4640, 7640 Transmission member (transmission member, movable member)
641, 2641, 3641 Main body part 643 Sliding hole (insertion part)
644 Contact portion 650 Torsion spring (biasing device, elastic spring)
652 Biasing arm (long member)
653a Bend part (first bending point)
3641a Slanted side (tip enlarged area)
5556 Recessed part (outer recessed part)
7613 Sliding hole (support part)
7643 Pivot hole (insertion part)
8812 Recessed part (part of changing means)
8825c1 Discharge port 8826 Direction changing part (part of changing means)
8826a First convex part (part of changing means)
8826b Second convex part (part of changing means)
8826c Third convex part (part of changing means)
8826d Fourth convex part (part of changing means)
10832a First extending claw part (part of changing means)
10832b Second extending claw part (part of changing means)
10833b Fourth extended claw part (part of changing means)
B83 Fourth downstream route (part of the first change route)
D Margin L81 Locus (part of the first flow path)
O81 First flow path (part of second flow path)
X81 First path (part of the second flow path, part of the second change path)
X82 Second path (part of the second flow path)
Y81 Downstream path (part of the first flow path)
P81, P82, P83, P84 Nails (part of the distribution means)
X91 Downstream path (part of the second flow path)
S81 Confluence area

Claims (1)

a first driving means;
a movable means configured to be movable along a predetermined movement trajectory by the driving force of the first driving means;
A second driving means,
A predetermined moving means that is movable upward from a predetermined position by the driving force of the second drive means moves with a falling motion, and a predetermined portion of the movable means that is moved along the predetermined movement locus is moved. a first situation in which the movement width of the movable means can be limited by contact;
a second situation in which the predetermined moving means does not come into contact with a predetermined portion of the movable means;
In the first situation, the predetermined moving means is capable of contacting a plurality of positions including a first position of the predetermined part or a second position of the predetermined part different from the first position,
A movement width of the movable means when the predetermined moving means is brought into contact with the first position and a movement width of the movable means when the predetermined moving means is brought into contact with the second position. Unlike,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first situation can be changed to the second situation by moving the movable means along the predetermined movement trajectory .

Images